[go: up one dir, main page]

HK1245421B - Device manufacturing system, and pattern formation apparatus - Google Patents

Device manufacturing system, and pattern formation apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
HK1245421B
HK1245421B HK18104878.9A HK18104878A HK1245421B HK 1245421 B HK1245421 B HK 1245421B HK 18104878 A HK18104878 A HK 18104878A HK 1245421 B HK1245421 B HK 1245421B
Authority
HK
Hong Kong
Prior art keywords
substrate
sheet substrate
unit
roller
exposure
Prior art date
Application number
HK18104878.9A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
HK1245421A1 (en
Inventor
铃木智也
鈴木智也
小宫山弘树
加藤正纪
小宮山弘樹
渡边智行
鬼头义昭
加藤正紀
堀正和
林田洋佑
渡邊智行
木内彻
鬼頭義昭
林田洋祐
木內徹
Original Assignee
株式会社尼康
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2013142922A external-priority patent/JP2015018006A/en
Priority claimed from JP2014123088A external-priority patent/JP6459234B2/en
Application filed by 株式会社尼康 filed Critical 株式会社尼康
Publication of HK1245421A1 publication Critical patent/HK1245421A1/en
Publication of HK1245421B publication Critical patent/HK1245421B/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/708Construction of apparatus, e.g. environment aspects, hygiene aspects or materials
    • G03F7/70858Environment aspects, e.g. pressure of beam-path gas, temperature
    • G03F7/709Vibration, e.g. vibration detection, compensation, suppression or isolation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/24Curved surfaces
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70058Mask illumination systems
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70691Handling of masks or workpieces
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70691Handling of masks or workpieces
    • G03F7/70758Drive means, e.g. actuators, motors for long- or short-stroke modules or fine or coarse driving
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70691Handling of masks or workpieces
    • G03F7/70775Position control, e.g. interferometers or encoders for determining the stage position
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K77/00Constructional details of devices covered by this subclass and not covered by groups H10K10/80, H10K30/80, H10K50/80 or H10K59/80
    • H10K77/10Substrates, e.g. flexible substrates
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02EREDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
    • Y02E10/00Energy generation through renewable energy sources
    • Y02E10/50Photovoltaic [PV] energy
    • Y02E10/549Organic PV cells
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P70/00Climate change mitigation technologies in the production process for final industrial or consumer products
    • Y02P70/50Manufacturing or production processes characterised by the final manufactured product

Landscapes

  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Environmental & Geological Engineering (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Atmospheric Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • Container, Conveyance, Adherence, Positioning, Of Wafer (AREA)
  • Investigating Materials By The Use Of Optical Means Adapted For Particular Applications (AREA)
  • Photosensitive Polymer And Photoresist Processing (AREA)

Abstract

 The purpose of the present invention is to suitably perform exposure using an exposure unit by further reducing vibration imparted to the exposure unit. A substrate processing apparatus (U3) is provided with: a shock-absorbing table (131) provided on a placement surface (E); an exposure unit (121), provided on the shock-absorbing table (131), for performing an exposure process on a supplied substrate (P); and a position adjustment unit (120) and a drive unit (122) provided on the placement surface (E) and provided, as processing units for performing a process on the exposure unit (121), in an independent state out of contact with the exposure unit (121).

Description

器件制造系统及图案形成装置Device manufacturing system and pattern forming device

本申请是PCT国际申请号为PCT/JP2014/066885、申请日为2014年6月25日、国家申请号为201480049332.7、发明名称为“基板处理装置、器件制造系统、器件制造方法及图案形成装置”的发明专利申请的分案申请。This application is a divisional application of the invention patent application with PCT international application number PCT/JP2014/066885, application date June 25, 2014, national application number 201480049332.7, and invention name "Substrate processing device, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method and pattern forming device".

技术领域Technical Field

本发明涉及用于在基板上形成电子器件用图案的基板处理装置、器件制造系统、器件制造方法及图案形成装置。The present invention relates to a substrate processing device, a device manufacturing system, a device manufacturing method and a pattern forming device for forming a pattern for an electronic device on a substrate.

背景技术Background Art

以往,如日本特开平9-219353号公报所示,作为基板处理装置,公知有对设于在平板上移动的移动载台上的基板进行器件图案的曝光的曝光装置。该曝光装置的平板经由具有减振机构的安装部件而支承在基台上。移动载台在设于平板上的可动引导件上沿X方向移动。可动引导件通过设于基台上的两台线性马达而在平板上沿Y方向移动。两台线性马达设在基台的X方向的两侧,以非接触的方式使可动引导件沿Y方向移动。也就是说,各线性马达具有动子和定子,定子固定在基台上,另一方面,动子分别固定在可动引导件的X方向的两侧,动子与定子为非接触状态。上述日本特开平9-219353号公报的曝光装置中,由于线性马达的动子及定子为非接触状态,所以抑制了因外部干扰产生的振动经由可动引导件及移动载台而传递到平板上。Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-219353, as a substrate processing device, there is known an exposure device for exposing a device pattern on a substrate disposed on a movable stage that moves on a flat plate. The flat plate of the exposure device is supported on a base via a mounting component having a vibration reduction mechanism. The movable stage moves in the X direction on a movable guide disposed on the flat plate. The movable guide moves in the Y direction on the flat plate by two linear motors disposed on the base. The two linear motors are disposed on both sides of the base in the X direction, and move the movable guide in the Y direction in a non-contact manner. That is, each linear motor has a mover and a stator, the stator is fixed on the base, and on the other hand, the mover is respectively fixed on both sides of the movable guide in the X direction, and the mover and the stator are in a non-contact state. In the exposure device of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-219353, since the mover and the stator of the linear motor are in a non-contact state, the vibration generated by external disturbance is suppressed from being transmitted to the flat plate via the movable guide and the movable stage.

发明内容Summary of the invention

在上述特开平9-219353号公报的曝光装置中,通过两台线性马达使可动引导件在平板上沿Y方向移动,同样地,移动载台相对于可动引导件的移动也利用线性马达来进行。该情况下,线性马达也以非接触的方式使移动载台沿X方向移动。但是,由于在平板上使移动载台相对于可动引导件移动,所以因移动载台的移动而产生的振动可能传递到平板。In the exposure device of the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-219353, the movable guide is moved on the flat plate in the Y direction by two linear motors, and similarly, the movement of the movable stage relative to the movable guide is also performed by the linear motor. In this case, the linear motor also moves the movable stage in the X direction in a non-contact manner. However, since the movable stage is moved on the flat plate relative to the movable guide, the vibration generated by the movement of the movable stage may be transmitted to the flat plate.

另外,上述日本特开平9-219353号公报的曝光装置在移动载台上保持基板来进行曝光,但不限于该结构,也存在以连续状态供给膜状的基板并针对供给的基板对器件图案进行扫描曝光的情况。该情况下,在供给基板时,基板可能会振动。In addition, the exposure device of the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Publication No. 9-219353 performs exposure by holding a substrate on a movable stage, but is not limited to this structure, and there is also a case where a film-like substrate is continuously supplied and a device pattern is scanned and exposed on the supplied substrate. In this case, the substrate may vibrate when the substrate is supplied.

本发明的方案是鉴于上述课题而研发的,其目的在于提供一种能够进一步降低对曝光单元带来的振动、并通过曝光单元良好地进行曝光的基板处理装置、器件制造系统、器件制造方法及图案形成装置。The solution of the present invention is developed in view of the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a substrate processing device, a device manufacturing system, a device manufacturing method and a pattern forming device that can further reduce the vibration caused to the exposure unit and perform good exposure through the exposure unit.

本发明的第1方案为一种基板处理装置,具有:减振台,其设在设置面上;曝光单元,其设在上述减振台上,且对供给的基板进行曝光处理;和处理单元,其设在上述设置面上且与上述曝光单元以非接触的独立状态设置,并对上述曝光单元进行处理。The first scheme of the present invention is a substrate processing device, comprising: a vibration-damping table, which is arranged on a setting surface; an exposure unit, which is arranged on the above-mentioned vibration-damping table and performs exposure processing on a supplied substrate; and a processing unit, which is arranged on the above-mentioned setting surface and is arranged in a non-contact independent state with the above-mentioned exposure unit, and processes the above-mentioned exposure unit.

本发明的第1方案为上述基板处理装置,也可以是,上述处理单元包括对向上述曝光单元供给的上述基板的宽度方向上的位置进行调整的位置调整单元,上述位置调整单元具有:基台,其设在上述设置面上;宽度方向移动机构,其设在上述基台上,且使上述基板相对于上述基台沿上述基板的宽度方向移动;和固定辊,其设在上述基台上,将通过上述宽度方向移动机构进行位置调整后的上述基板朝向上述曝光单元引导,并且,该固定辊相对于上述基台的位置是固定的。The first scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned substrate processing device, and it can also be that the above-mentioned processing unit includes a position adjustment unit for adjusting the position in the width direction of the above-mentioned substrate supplied to the above-mentioned exposure unit, and the above-mentioned position adjustment unit has: a base, which is arranged on the above-mentioned setting surface; a width-direction moving mechanism, which is arranged on the above-mentioned base and moves the above-mentioned substrate relative to the above-mentioned base in the width direction of the above-mentioned substrate; and a fixed roller, which is arranged on the above-mentioned base and guides the above-mentioned substrate after the position is adjusted by the above-mentioned width-direction moving mechanism toward the above-mentioned exposure unit, and the position of the fixed roller relative to the above-mentioned base is fixed.

本发明的第1方案为上述基板处理装置,也可以是,还具有:第1基板检测部,其固定地设在上述基台上,检测供给到上述固定辊的上述基板的宽度方向上的位置;和控制部,其基于上述第1基板检测部的检测结果来控制上述宽度方向移动机构,从而将供给到上述固定辊的上述基板的宽度方向上的位置修正为第1目标位置。The first scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned substrate processing device, and it may also be that it further comprises: a first substrate detection unit, which is fixedly arranged on the above-mentioned base, and detects the position of the above-mentioned substrate supplied to the above-mentioned fixed roller in the width direction; and a control unit, which controls the above-mentioned width direction moving mechanism based on the detection result of the above-mentioned first substrate detection unit, thereby correcting the position of the above-mentioned substrate supplied to the above-mentioned fixed roller in the width direction to the first target position.

本发明的第1方案为上述基板处理装置,也可以是,上述位置调整单元还具有调整上述固定辊相对于上述曝光单元的位置的辊位置调整机构,上述基板处理装置还具有:第2基板检测部,其固定地设在上述减振台上,检测供给到上述曝光单元的上述基板的位置;和控制部,其基于上述第2基板检测部的检测结果来控制上述辊位置调整机构,从而将供给到上述曝光单元的上述基板的位置修正为第2目标位置。The first scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned substrate processing device, and it can also be that the above-mentioned position adjustment unit also has a roller position adjustment mechanism for adjusting the position of the above-mentioned fixed roller relative to the above-mentioned exposure unit, and the above-mentioned substrate processing device also has: a second substrate detection unit, which is fixedly arranged on the above-mentioned vibration reduction table to detect the position of the above-mentioned substrate supplied to the above-mentioned exposure unit; and a control unit, which controls the above-mentioned roller position adjustment mechanism based on the detection result of the above-mentioned second substrate detection unit, thereby correcting the position of the above-mentioned substrate supplied to the above-mentioned exposure unit to the second target position.

本发明的第1方案为上述基板处理装置,也可以是,还具有:推压机构,其对从上述位置调整单元向上述曝光单元供给的上述基板以赋予张力的方式进行推压;第2基板检测部,其固定地设在上述减振台上,检测供给到上述曝光单元的上述基板的位置;和控制部,其基于上述第2基板检测部的检测结果来控制上述推压机构,从而调整对上述基板的推压量。The first scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned substrate processing device, and it can also be that it also has: a pushing mechanism, which pushes the above-mentioned substrate supplied from the above-mentioned position adjustment unit to the above-mentioned exposure unit in a manner of imparting tension; a second substrate detection unit, which is fixedly arranged on the above-mentioned vibration reduction table, and detects the position of the above-mentioned substrate supplied to the above-mentioned exposure unit; and a control unit, which controls the above-mentioned pushing mechanism based on the detection result of the above-mentioned second substrate detection unit, thereby adjusting the pushing amount of the above-mentioned substrate.

本发明的第1方案为上述基板处理装置,也可以是,上述处理单元包括驱动上述曝光单元的驱动单元,上述曝光单元具有:对被照明光照明的光罩进行保持的光罩保持部件;和对来自上述光罩的投影光所投射的上述基板进行支承的基板支承部件,上述驱动单元具有:为了使上述光罩沿扫描方向移动而驱动上述光罩保持部件的光罩侧驱动部;和为了使上述基板沿扫描方向移动而驱动上述基板支承部件的基板侧驱动部。The first scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned substrate processing device, and it can also be that the above-mentioned processing unit includes a driving unit for driving the above-mentioned exposure unit, and the above-mentioned exposure unit has: a mask holding component for holding a mask illuminated by the illumination light; and a substrate supporting component for supporting the above-mentioned substrate projected with the projection light from the above-mentioned mask, and the above-mentioned driving unit has: a mask side driving part for driving the above-mentioned mask holding component in order to move the above-mentioned mask along the scanning direction; and a substrate side driving part for driving the above-mentioned substrate supporting component in order to move the above-mentioned substrate along the scanning direction.

本发明的第1方案为上述基板处理装置,也可以是,上述曝光单元具有:支承上述光罩保持部件的第1框架;和支承上述基板支承部件的第2框架,上述减振台包括设在上述设置面与上述第1框架之间的第1减振台、和设在上述设置面与上述第2框架之间的第2减振台。The first scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned substrate processing device, and it can also be that the above-mentioned exposure unit has: a first frame supporting the above-mentioned mask holding component; and a second frame supporting the above-mentioned substrate supporting component, and the above-mentioned vibration-damping table includes a first vibration-damping table arranged between the above-mentioned setting surface and the above-mentioned first frame, and a second vibration-damping table arranged between the above-mentioned setting surface and the above-mentioned second frame.

本发明的第1方案为上述基板处理装置,也可以是,上述曝光单元具有支承上述光罩保持部件及上述基板支承部件的框架,上述减振台设在上述设置面与上述框架之间。A first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the exposure unit includes a frame that supports the mask holding member and the substrate supporting member, and the vibration-damping table is provided between the installation surface and the frame.

本发明的第1方案为上述基板处理装置,也可以是,上述光罩保持部件对具有以第1轴为中心且为第1曲率半径的光罩面的上述光罩进行保持,上述光罩侧驱动部通过使上述光罩保持部件旋转驱动来使上述光罩沿扫描方向移动,上述基板支承部件沿着以第2轴为中心且为第2曲率半径的支承面,来支承上述基板,上述基板侧驱动部通过使上述基板支承部件旋转驱动来使上述基板沿扫描方向移动。The first scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned substrate processing device, and it can also be that the above-mentioned mask holding component holds the above-mentioned mask having a mask surface with a first axis as the center and a first curvature radius, the above-mentioned mask side driving unit moves the above-mentioned mask along the scanning direction by rotating the above-mentioned mask holding component, the above-mentioned substrate supporting component supports the above-mentioned substrate along a supporting surface with a second axis as the center and a second curvature radius, and the above-mentioned substrate side driving unit moves the above-mentioned substrate along the scanning direction by rotating the above-mentioned substrate supporting component.

本发明的第1方案为上述基板处理装置,也可以是,上述光罩保持部件对具有成为平面的光罩面的上述光罩进行保持,上述光罩侧驱动部通过使上述光罩保持部件直线驱动来使上述光罩沿扫描方向移动,上述基板支承部件沿着以第2轴为中心且为第2曲率半径的支承面,来支承上述基板,上述基板侧驱动部通过使上述基板支承部件旋转驱动来使上述基板沿扫描方向移动。The first scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned substrate processing device, and it can also be that the above-mentioned mask holding component holds the above-mentioned mask having a planar mask surface, the above-mentioned mask side driving unit moves the above-mentioned mask along the scanning direction by linearly driving the above-mentioned mask holding component, the above-mentioned substrate supporting component supports the above-mentioned substrate along a supporting surface with a second axis as the center and a second curvature radius, and the above-mentioned substrate side driving unit moves the above-mentioned substrate along the scanning direction by rotationally driving the above-mentioned substrate supporting component.

本发明的第1方案为上述基板处理装置,也可以是,上述光罩保持部件对具有以第1轴为中心且为第1曲率半径的光罩面的上述光罩进行保持,上述光罩侧驱动部通过使上述光罩保持部件旋转驱动来使上述光罩沿扫描方向移动,上述基板支承部件具有一对支承辊,其以使上述基板具有平面的方式,能够旋转地支承上述基板的扫描方向上的两侧,上述基板侧驱动部通过使上述一对支承辊旋转驱动来使上述基板沿扫描方向移动。The first scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned substrate processing device, and it can also be that the above-mentioned mask holding component holds the above-mentioned mask having a mask surface with a first axis as the center and a first curvature radius, the above-mentioned mask side driving unit moves the above-mentioned mask along the scanning direction by rotating the above-mentioned mask holding component, the above-mentioned substrate supporting component has a pair of supporting rollers, which can rotatably support both sides of the above-mentioned substrate in the scanning direction in a manner that the above-mentioned substrate has a plane, and the above-mentioned substrate side driving unit moves the above-mentioned substrate along the scanning direction by rotating the above-mentioned pair of supporting rollers.

本发明的第2方案为一种器件制造系统,具有:本发明的第1方案的基板处理装置;向上述基板处理装置供给上述基板的基板供给装置;和对由上述基板处理装置处理后的上述基板进行回收的基板回收装置。The second scheme of the present invention is a device manufacturing system, comprising: a substrate processing device of the first scheme of the present invention; a substrate supply device for supplying the above-mentioned substrate to the above-mentioned substrate processing device; and a substrate recovery device for recovering the above-mentioned substrate after being processed by the above-mentioned substrate processing device.

本发明的第2方案为上述器件制造系统,也可以是,上述基板供给装置具有:第1轴承部,其将供给用卷能够旋转地支承,其中该供给用卷是将上述基板卷绕成卷状而得到的;第1升降机构,其使上述第1轴承部升降;进入角度检测部,其检测从上述供给用卷送出的上述基板相对于要卷绕上述基板的第1辊的进入角度;和控制部,其基于上述进入角度检测部的检测结果来控制上述第1升降机构,从而将上述进入角度修正为目标进入角度。The second scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned device manufacturing system, and it can also be that the above-mentioned substrate supply device has: a first bearing portion, which rotatably supports the supply roll, wherein the supply roll is obtained by winding the above-mentioned substrate into a roll; a first lifting mechanism, which lifts and lowers the above-mentioned first bearing portion; an entry angle detection portion, which detects the entry angle of the above-mentioned substrate sent out from the above-mentioned supply roll relative to the first roller to wind the above-mentioned substrate; and a control portion, which controls the above-mentioned first lifting mechanism based on the detection result of the above-mentioned entry angle detection portion, thereby correcting the above-mentioned entry angle to the target entry angle.

本发明的第2方案为上述器件制造系统,也可以是,上述基板回收装置具有:第2轴承部,其将回收用卷能够旋转地支承,其中该回收用卷对由上述基板处理装置进行了处理的处理后的上述基板进行卷绕;第2升降机构,其使上述第2轴承部升降;排出角度检测部,其检测向上述回收用卷送出的上述基板相对于要卷绕上述基板的第2辊的排出角度;和控制部,其基于上述排出角度检测部的检测结果来控制上述第2升降机构,从而将上述排出角度修正为目标排出角度。The second scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned device manufacturing system, and it can also be that the above-mentioned substrate recovery device has: a second bearing portion, which rotatably supports the recovery roll, wherein the recovery roll winds up the above-mentioned substrate processed by the above-mentioned substrate processing device; a second lifting mechanism, which lifts and lowers the above-mentioned second bearing portion; a discharge angle detection portion, which detects the discharge angle of the above-mentioned substrate sent to the above-mentioned recovery roll relative to the second roller to wind up the above-mentioned substrate; and a control portion, which controls the above-mentioned second lifting mechanism based on the detection result of the above-mentioned discharge angle detection portion, thereby correcting the above-mentioned discharge angle to the target discharge angle.

本发明的第3方案为一种器件制造方法,包括:使用本发明的第1方案的基板处理装置对上述基板进行曝光处理;和通过对曝光处理后的上述基板进行处理,形成上述光罩的图案。A third aspect of the present invention is a device manufacturing method, comprising: performing exposure processing on the substrate using the substrate processing apparatus of the first aspect of the present invention; and forming a pattern of the mask by processing the substrate after the exposure processing.

本发明的第4方案为一种图案形成装置,将长尺寸的挠性的片材基板沿长边方向搬送的同时在该片材基板上的规定位置形成图案,具有:图案化装置,其具有包括用于将上述片材基板沿着规定的搬送路径在长边方向上搬送的多个引导辊在内的搬送部、和设在上述搬送路径的一部分且将上述图案形成到上述片材基板的表面的上述规定位置的图案形成部;减振装置,其设在设置有上述图案化装置的基台面与上述图案化装置之间;位置调整装置,其与上述图案化装置独立设置且设置在上述基台面上,包括用于朝向上述图案化装置的上述搬送部送出上述片材基板的引导辊,并且在与上述片材基板的长边方向正交的宽度方向上调整上述片材基板的位置;基板误差计测部,其相对于上述搬送路径中的上述图案形成部而在上游侧,计测与上述片材基板的上述宽度方向上的位置变化、姿势变化、或上述片材基板的变形相关的变化信息;和控制装置,其基于上述变化信息来控制上述位置调整装置。The fourth scheme of the present invention is a pattern forming device, which forms a pattern at a specified position on a sheet substrate while conveying a long flexible sheet substrate in the long-side direction, and comprises: a patterning device, which has a conveying section including a plurality of guide rollers for conveying the sheet substrate in the long-side direction along a specified conveying path, and a pattern forming section which is provided at a part of the conveying path and forms the pattern at the specified position on the surface of the sheet substrate; a vibration reduction device, which is provided between a base surface on which the patterning device is provided and the patterning device; a position adjustment device, which It is independently arranged from the patterning device and is arranged on the base surface, including a guide roller for sending the sheet substrate toward the conveying portion of the patterning device and adjusting the position of the sheet substrate in a width direction orthogonal to the long side direction of the sheet substrate; a substrate error measuring portion, which is on the upstream side relative to the pattern forming portion in the conveying path, and measures change information related to the position change, posture change, or deformation of the sheet substrate in the width direction of the sheet substrate; and a control device, which controls the position adjustment device based on the change information.

本发明的第4方案为上述图案形成装置,也可以是,上述基板误差计测部通过检测上述片材基板的宽度方向上的边缘或形成在上述片材基板上的标记,来计测上述变化信息。A fourth aspect of the present invention is the pattern forming apparatus, wherein the substrate error measuring section may measure the change information by detecting an edge in a width direction of the sheet substrate or a mark formed on the sheet substrate.

本发明的第4方案为上述图案形成装置,也可以是,上述基板误差计测部设在上述图案化装置及上述位置调整装置中的至少一方上。A fourth aspect of the present invention is the pattern forming apparatus, wherein the substrate error measuring section may be provided on at least one of the patterning apparatus and the position adjusting apparatus.

本发明的第4方案为一种图案形成装置,将长尺寸的挠性的片材基板沿长边方向搬送的同时,在该片材基板上的规定位置形成图案,具有:图案化装置,其具有包括用于将上述片材基板沿着规定的搬送路径在长边方向上搬送的多个引导辊在内的搬送部、和设在上述搬送路径的一部分上并在上述片材基板的表面的上述规定位置形成上述图案的图案形成部;减振装置,其设在设置有上述图案化装置的基台面与上述图案化装置之间;位置调整装置,其与上述图案化装置独立地设置且设置在上述基台面上,包括用于朝向上述图案化装置的上述搬送部送出上述片材基板的引导辊,并且在与上述片材基板的长边方向正交的宽度方向上调整上述片材基板的位置;位置误差计测部,其计测上述图案化装置与上述位置调整装置的相对的位置变化所相关的变化信息;和控制装置,其基于上述变化信息来控制上述位置调整装置。The fourth scheme of the present invention is a pattern forming device, which forms a pattern at a specified position on a long flexible sheet substrate while conveying it along the long side direction, and comprises: a patterning device, which has a conveying section including a plurality of guide rollers for conveying the sheet substrate along a specified conveying path in the long side direction, and a pattern forming section which is provided on a part of the conveying path and forms the pattern at the specified position on the surface of the sheet substrate; a vibration damping device, which is provided between a base surface on which the patterning device is provided and the patterning device; a position adjustment device, which is provided independently of the patterning device and is provided on the base surface, and includes guide rollers for conveying the sheet substrate toward the conveying section of the patterning device and adjusting the position of the sheet substrate in a width direction orthogonal to the long side direction of the sheet substrate; a position error measuring section, which measures change information related to the relative position change of the patterning device and the position adjustment device; and a control device, which controls the position adjustment device based on the change information.

本发明的第4方案为上述图案形成装置,也可以是,具有能够倾斜的调整辊,其设在上述图案化装置内,相对于上述搬送路径中的上述图案形成部而在上游侧,配置成在上述长边方向上施有规定的张力的状态下,将上述片材基板的上述搬送路径折曲,上述控制装置通过基于上述变化信息使上述调整辊倾斜,来调整向图案形成部搬送的片材基板的宽度方向上的位置。The fourth scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned pattern forming device, and may also be a device having a tiltable adjustment roller, which is arranged in the above-mentioned patterning device and is located on the upstream side relative to the above-mentioned pattern forming portion in the above-mentioned conveying path, and is configured to bend the above-mentioned conveying path of the above-mentioned sheet substrate under a state in which a prescribed tension is applied in the above-mentioned long side direction. The above-mentioned control device adjusts the position in the width direction of the sheet substrate conveyed to the pattern forming portion by tilting the above-mentioned adjustment roller based on the above-mentioned change information.

本发明的第5方案为一种器件制造系统,将长尺寸的挠性的片材基板沿长边方向搬送的同时,对该片材基板依次实施第1处理、第2处理,具有:第1处理单元,其设在规定的基台面上,包括用于将上述片材基板沿着规定的搬送路径在长边方向上输送的多个辊,并对上述片材基板实施上述第1处理;第2处理单元,其设置在上述基台面上,包括用于将从上述第1处理单元输送来的上述片材基板沿着规定的搬送路径在长边方向上输送的多个辊,并对上述片材基板实施上述第2处理;防振装置,其抑制或隔绝上述基台面与上述第1处理单元之间的振动传递、或上述基台面与上述第2处理单元之间的振动传递、或上述第1处理单元与上述第2处理单元之间的振动传递;变化计测部,其对与上述第1处理单元与上述第2处理单元的相对的位置变化、或从上述第1处理单元向上述第2处理单元搬送的上述片材基板的位置变化相关的变化信息进行计测;位置调整装置,其基于上述变化信息来调整向上述第2处理单元内搬入的上述片材基板的与长边方向正交的宽度方向上的位置。The fifth scheme of the present invention is a device manufacturing system, which transports a long flexible sheet substrate along the long side direction while performing a first treatment and a second treatment on the sheet substrate in sequence, and comprises: a first treatment unit, which is arranged on a specified base surface, includes a plurality of rollers for transporting the sheet substrate along a specified transport path in the long side direction, and performs the first treatment on the sheet substrate; a second treatment unit, which is arranged on the base surface, includes a plurality of rollers for transporting the sheet substrate transported from the first treatment unit along a specified transport path in the long side direction, and performs the second treatment on the sheet substrate; and a vibration-proof device. A device that suppresses or isolates the vibration transmission between the above-mentioned base surface and the above-mentioned first processing unit, or the vibration transmission between the above-mentioned base surface and the above-mentioned second processing unit, or the vibration transmission between the above-mentioned first processing unit and the above-mentioned second processing unit; a change measuring unit that measures change information related to the relative position change between the above-mentioned first processing unit and the above-mentioned second processing unit, or the position change of the above-mentioned sheet substrate conveyed from the above-mentioned first processing unit to the above-mentioned second processing unit; a position adjustment device that adjusts the position of the above-mentioned sheet substrate conveyed into the above-mentioned second processing unit in the width direction orthogonal to the long side direction based on the above-mentioned change information.

本发明的第5方案为上述器件制造系统,也可以是,上述第2处理单元是包含曝光装置和印刷装置中的某一方的图案化装置,其中,该曝光装置为了在上述片材基板的长边方向上形成电子器件用的图案,而向形成于上述片材基板的表面的光感应层投射与上述图案相应的光能,该印刷装置通过涂敷含有导电材料、绝缘材料、半导体材料中的某一种的墨水而在上述片材基板的表面上描画上述图案。The fifth scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned device manufacturing system, and it can also be that the above-mentioned second processing unit is a patterning device including one of an exposure device and a printing device, wherein the exposure device projects light energy corresponding to the above-mentioned pattern onto a photosensitive layer formed on the surface of the above-mentioned sheet substrate in order to form a pattern for electronic devices in the long side direction of the above-mentioned sheet substrate, and the printing device draws the above-mentioned pattern on the surface of the above-mentioned sheet substrate by applying ink containing one of conductive material, insulating material, and semiconductor material.

本发明的第5方案为上述器件制造系统,也可以是,上述第1处理单元由实施与通过上述图案化装置在上述片材基板上实施的处理的前工序相当的处理的、单独的或多个前处理装置构成,上述位置调整装置设于在上述片材基板的搬送路上设置在上述图案化装置紧前的上述前处理装置内、或上述紧前的前处理装置与上述图案化装置之间。The fifth scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned device manufacturing system, and it can also be that the above-mentioned first processing unit is composed of a single or multiple pre-processing devices that implement a processing equivalent to the pre-process of the processing implemented on the above-mentioned sheet substrate by the above-mentioned patterning device, and the above-mentioned position adjustment device is arranged in the above-mentioned pre-processing device arranged immediately before the above-mentioned patterning device on the conveying path of the above-mentioned sheet substrate, or between the above-mentioned immediately preceding pre-processing device and the above-mentioned patterning device.

本发明的第5方案为上述器件制造系统,也可以是,上述位置调整装置具有:将上述片材基板在长边方向上折曲而引导搬送的多个旋转辊;使该多个旋转辊中的一部分旋转辊沿旋转中心轴的方向平行移动的驱动机构;和基于由上述变化计测部计测的上述变化信息来控制上述驱动机构的控制部。The fifth scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned device manufacturing system, and it can also be that the above-mentioned position adjustment device has: a plurality of rotating rollers that bend the above-mentioned sheet substrate in the long side direction and guide it for transportation; a driving mechanism that causes a part of the plurality of rotating rollers to move parallel to the direction of the rotation center axis; and a control unit that controls the above-mentioned driving mechanism based on the above-mentioned change information measured by the above-mentioned change measuring unit.

本发明的第5方案为上述器件制造系统,也可以是,上述位置调整装置具有:将上述片材基板在长边方向上折曲而引导搬送的多个旋转辊;使该多个旋转辊中的一部分旋转辊的旋转中心轴倾斜的驱动部;和基于由上述变化计测部计测的上述变化信息来控制上述驱动部的控制部。The fifth scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned device manufacturing system, and it can also be that the above-mentioned position adjustment device has: a plurality of rotating rollers that bend the above-mentioned sheet substrate in the long side direction and guide it for transportation; a driving unit that tilts the rotation center axis of some of the plurality of rotating rollers; and a control unit that controls the above-mentioned driving unit based on the above-mentioned change information measured by the above-mentioned change measuring unit.

本发明的第5方案为上述器件制造系统,也可以是,上述变化计测部包括传感器,该传感器配置在上述第1处理单元与上述第2处理单元之间的上述片材基板的搬送路上,且将与上述长边方向正交的上述片材基板的宽度方向上的倾斜变化作为上述变化信息来检测。The fifth scheme of the present invention is the above-mentioned device manufacturing system, and it can also be that the above-mentioned change measuring unit includes a sensor, which is arranged on the conveying path of the above-mentioned sheet substrate between the above-mentioned first processing unit and the above-mentioned second processing unit, and detects the inclination change of the above-mentioned sheet substrate in the width direction orthogonal to the above-mentioned long side direction as the above-mentioned change information.

根据本发明的方式,能够提供可进一步降低对曝光单元带来的振动、且可通过曝光单元良好地进行曝光的基板处理装置、器件制造系统、器件制造方法及图案形成装置。According to the aspects of the present invention, it is possible to provide a substrate processing apparatus, a device manufacturing system, a device manufacturing method, and a pattern forming apparatus that can further reduce vibration applied to an exposure unit and can perform good exposure by the exposure unit.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

图1是表示第1实施方式的器件制造系统的结构的图。FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration of a device manufacturing system according to a first embodiment.

图2是表示将第1实施方式的器件制造系统简化时的结构的图。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a simplified configuration of the device manufacturing system according to the first embodiment.

图3是表示第1实施方式的曝光装置(基板处理装置)的一部分结构的图。FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a partial configuration of the exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) according to the first embodiment.

图4是表示图3所示的第1实施方式的曝光装置的一部分结构的图。FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a partial configuration of the exposure apparatus according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .

图5是表示第1实施方式的曝光单元的整体结构的图。FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall structure of the exposure unit according to the first embodiment.

图6是表示图5所示的曝光单元的照明区域及投影区域的配置的图。FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the illumination area and the projection area of the exposure unit shown in FIG. 5 .

图7是表示图5所示的曝光单元的投影光学系统的结构的图。FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration of a projection optical system of the exposure unit shown in FIG. 5 .

图8是表示第1实施方式的器件制造方法的流程图。FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the device manufacturing method according to the first embodiment.

图9是表示第2实施方式的曝光装置(基板处理装置)的一部分结构的图。FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a partial configuration of an exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) according to a second embodiment.

图10是表示图9的第2实施方式的曝光单元的整体结构的图。FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the overall structure of the exposure unit of the second embodiment of FIG. 9 .

图11是表示第3实施方式的曝光单元的整体结构的图。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the overall structure of an exposure unit according to a third embodiment.

图12是表示第4实施方式的曝光装置的结构的图。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the structure of an exposure apparatus according to a fourth embodiment.

图13是从+Z方向侧观察在图12所示的曝光装置内搬送的基板时的图。FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a substrate being transported in the exposure apparatus shown in FIG. 12 as viewed from the +Z direction side.

图14是从-Y方向侧观察在图13所示的位置调整单元侧的最后一个辊与曝光单元侧的第一个辊之间搬送的基板P时的图。FIG. 14 is a diagram when the substrate P conveyed between the last roller on the position adjustment unit side and the first roller on the exposure unit side shown in FIG. 13 is viewed from the −Y direction side.

图15是从-X方向侧观察通过图12所示的旋转滚筒而搬送的基板时的图。FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a substrate conveyed by the rotating drum shown in FIG. 12 as viewed from the −X direction side.

图16是表示图12所示的基板调整部的结构的图。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the structure of the substrate adjustment unit shown in FIG. 12 .

图17A是表示图12所示的第2基板检测部的结构的图,图17B是表示通过第2基板检测部照射于基板的光束光的图,图17C是表示由第2基板检测部接受的光束光的图。17A is a diagram showing the structure of the second substrate detection unit shown in FIG. 12 , FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the light beam irradiated onto the substrate by the second substrate detection unit, and FIG. 17C is a diagram showing the light beam received by the second substrate detection unit.

图18是表示图12所示的相对位置检测部的结构的图。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration of a relative position detection unit shown in FIG. 12 .

图19是表示通过图12所示的曝光头在基板上扫描的点光的扫描线及对准显微镜的图。FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a scanning line of a spot light scanned on a substrate by the exposure head shown in FIG. 12 and an alignment microscope.

图20是表示图12所示的曝光头的描画单元的结构的图。FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration of a drawing unit of the exposure head shown in FIG. 12 .

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

以下,列举优选的实施方式,参照附图详细说明本发明的方案的基板处理装置、器件制造系统、器件制造方法及图案形成装置。此外,本发明的方案不限定于这些实施方式,也包含施加各种各样的变更或改良的方案。也就是说,在以下记载的结构要素中,包含本领域技术人员能够容易想到的、实质上相同的结构要素,能够将以下记载的结构要素适当组合。另外,能够在不脱离本发明的要旨的范围内进行各种结构要素的省略、置换或变更。Hereinafter, preferred embodiments are listed, and the substrate processing device, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method and pattern forming device of the scheme of the present invention are described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. In addition, the scheme of the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and also includes schemes in which various changes or improvements are applied. That is to say, among the structural elements described below, substantially the same structural elements that can be easily thought of by those skilled in the art are included, and the structural elements described below can be appropriately combined. In addition, various structural elements can be omitted, replaced or changed within the scope of the gist of the present invention.

[第1实施方式][First embodiment]

第1实施方式的基板处理装置是对基板实施曝光处理的曝光装置,曝光装置组入到对曝光后的基板实施各种处理来制造电子器件的器件制造系统中。首先,说明器件制造系统。The substrate processing apparatus of the first embodiment is an exposure apparatus that performs exposure processing on a substrate, and is incorporated into a device manufacturing system that performs various processing on the exposed substrate to manufacture electronic devices. First, the device manufacturing system will be described.

<器件制造系统><Device manufacturing system>

图1是表示第1实施方式的器件制造系统1的结构的图。图1所示的器件制造系统1是制造作为电子器件(也具有称作器件的情况)的柔性显示器的生产线(柔性显示器生产线)。作为柔性显示器,例如存在有机EL显示器等。该器件制造系统1为所谓的卷对卷(Rollto Roll)方式,即,将挠性的基板(片材基板)P卷绕成卷状而得到供给用卷FR1,将该基板P从供给用卷FR1送出,在对送出的基板P连续实施了各种处理后,用回收用卷FR2卷收处理后的基板P。在第1实施方式的器件制造系统1中,示出了从供给用卷FR1送出作为膜状片材的基板P、且从供给用卷FR1送出的基板P依次经由n台处理装置U1、U2、U3、U4、U5、…Un直至卷收于回收用卷FR2的例子。首先,说明成为器件制造系统1的处理对象的基板P。FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the structure of a device manufacturing system 1 according to the first embodiment. The device manufacturing system 1 shown in FIG. 1 is a production line (flexible display production line) for manufacturing a flexible display as an electronic device (also referred to as a device). As a flexible display, there is, for example, an organic EL display. The device manufacturing system 1 is a so-called roll-to-roll method, that is, a flexible substrate (sheet substrate) P is wound into a roll to obtain a supply roll FR1, the substrate P is sent out from the supply roll FR1, and after various treatments are continuously applied to the sent substrate P, the processed substrate P is rolled up with a recovery roll FR2. In the device manufacturing system 1 according to the first embodiment, an example is shown in which a substrate P as a film sheet is sent out from the supply roll FR1, and the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1 passes through n processing devices U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, ... Un in sequence until it is rolled up on the recovery roll FR2. First, the substrate P that is the processing object of the device manufacturing system 1 is described.

基板P使用例如树脂膜、由不锈钢等金属或合金构成的箔(foil)等。作为树脂膜的材质,可以使用包含例如聚乙烯树脂、聚丙烯树脂、聚酯树脂、乙烯乙烯醇共聚物树脂、聚氯乙烯树脂、纤维素树脂、聚酰胺树脂、聚酰亚胺树脂、聚碳酸酯树脂、聚苯乙烯树脂、醋酸乙烯酯树脂中的一种或两种以上的树脂。另外,关于基板P的厚度和刚性(杨氏模量),只要在搬送时不会在基板P上产生因压曲导致的折痕和/或非可逆性的褶皱这样的范围即可。作为电子器件,在制造柔性的显示器面板、触摸面板、彩色滤光片、防电磁波过滤器等的情况下,使用厚度为25μm~200μm左右的PET(聚对苯二甲酸乙二醇酯)或PEN(聚萘二甲酸乙二醇酯)等树脂片材。The substrate P uses, for example, a resin film, a foil made of a metal or alloy such as stainless steel, etc. As the material of the resin film, one or more resins including, for example, polyethylene resin, polypropylene resin, polyester resin, ethylene vinyl alcohol copolymer resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, cellulose resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, polycarbonate resin, polystyrene resin, and vinyl acetate resin can be used. In addition, regarding the thickness and rigidity (Young's modulus) of the substrate P, as long as creases and/or irreversible wrinkles caused by buckling are not generated on the substrate P during transportation, such a range is sufficient. As electronic devices, in the case of manufacturing flexible display panels, touch panels, color filters, electromagnetic wave protection filters, etc., resin sheets such as PET (polyethylene terephthalate) or PEN (polyethylene naphthalate) with a thickness of about 25μm to 200μm are used.

对于基板P,期望选定例如膨胀系数不明显大的材料,使得能够实质上忽视因在对基板P实施的各种处理中受到的热而产生的变形量。另外,若在作为基底的树脂膜中混合例如氧化钛、氧化铅、氧化铝、氧化硅等无机填充物,则也能够减小热膨胀系数。另外,基板P可以是以浮制法等制造的厚度为100μm左右的极薄玻璃的单层体,也可以是在该极薄玻璃粘贴上述的树脂膜或铝、铜等金属层(箔)等而成的层叠体。For the substrate P, it is desirable to select a material whose expansion coefficient is not significantly large, so that the deformation caused by the heat in the various treatments applied to the substrate P can be substantially ignored. In addition, if inorganic fillers such as titanium oxide, lead oxide, aluminum oxide, silicon oxide, etc. are mixed in the resin film serving as the base, the thermal expansion coefficient can also be reduced. In addition, the substrate P can be a single layer of extremely thin glass with a thickness of about 100 μm manufactured by a float method, etc., or it can be a laminated body formed by pasting the above-mentioned resin film or a metal layer (foil) such as aluminum or copper on the extremely thin glass.

另外,基板P的挠性是指,即使对基板P施加自重程度的力也不会剪断或断裂而能够使该基板P挠曲的性质。另外,通过自重程度的力而弯曲的性质也包含于挠性。另外,根据基板P的材质、大小、厚度、成膜于基板P上的层构造、包括温度、湿度在内的环境等,挠性的程度会变化。总之,只要在将基板P正确地卷绕于设在本实施方式的器件制造系统1内的搬送路上的各种搬送用辊、旋转滚筒等搬送方向转换用部件的情况下,能够不会压曲而产生折痕或发生破损(破坏或破裂)地顺畅地搬送基板P,则均可称为挠性的范围。In addition, the flexibility of the substrate P refers to the property of being able to bend the substrate P without shearing or breaking even if a force of the degree of its own weight is applied to the substrate P. In addition, the property of bending due to a force of the degree of its own weight is also included in flexibility. In addition, the degree of flexibility will vary depending on the material, size, thickness, layer structure formed on the substrate P, environment including temperature and humidity, etc. of the substrate P. In short, as long as the substrate P can be smoothly conveyed without being buckled, creased, or damaged (destroyed or broken) when it is correctly wound on various conveying rollers, rotating drums and other conveying direction conversion components provided on the conveying path within the device manufacturing system 1 of this embodiment, it can be said to be within the range of flexibility.

这样构成的基板P通过卷绕成卷状而成为供给用卷FR1,该供给用卷FR1安装在器件制造系统1上。安装有供给用卷FR1的器件制造系统1对从供给用卷FR1送出的基板P重复执行用于制造电子器件的各种处理。因此,处理后的基板P成为多个电子器件相连的状态。也就是说,从供给用卷FR1送出的基板P成为拼版用的基板。此外,基板P可以预先通过规定的前处理使其表面改性而活性化,或者,也可以在表面上形成有用于精密图案化的微细的隔壁构造(凹凸构造)。The substrate P thus constructed becomes a supply reel FR1 by being wound into a roll, and the supply reel FR1 is installed on the device manufacturing system 1. The device manufacturing system 1 equipped with the supply reel FR1 repeatedly performs various processes for manufacturing electronic devices on the substrate P sent out from the supply reel FR1. Therefore, the processed substrate P becomes a state in which a plurality of electronic devices are connected. In other words, the substrate P sent out from the supply reel FR1 becomes a substrate for platemaking. In addition, the substrate P can be preliminarily surface-modified and activated by a predetermined pretreatment, or a fine partition structure (concave-convex structure) for precision patterning can be formed on the surface.

处理后的基板P通过卷绕成卷状而回收为回收用卷FR2。回收用卷FR2安装在未图示的切割装置上。安装有回收用卷FR2的切割装置将处理后的基板P按每个电子器件进行分割(切割),由此成为多个电子器件。关于基板P的尺寸,例如,宽度方向(成为短边的方向)的尺寸为10cm~2m左右,长度方向(成为长边的方向)的尺寸为10m以上。此外,基板P的尺寸不限定于上述的尺寸。The processed substrate P is recovered as a recycling roll FR2 by being wound into a roll. The recycling roll FR2 is installed on a cutting device not shown in the figure. The cutting device equipped with the recycling roll FR2 divides (cuts) the processed substrate P according to each electronic component, thereby becoming a plurality of electronic components. Regarding the size of the substrate P, for example, the size in the width direction (the direction of the short side) is about 10 cm to 2 m, and the size in the length direction (the direction of the long side) is more than 10 m. In addition, the size of the substrate P is not limited to the above-mentioned size.

参照图1接着说明器件制造系统1。在图1中,为X方向、Y方向及Z方向正交的正交坐标系。X方向在水平面内是基板P的搬送方向,是将供给用卷FR1及回收用卷FR2连结的方向。Y方向是在水平面内与X方向正交的方向,是基板P的宽度方向。Y方向为供给用卷FR1及回收用卷FR2的轴向。Z方向是与X方向和Y方向正交的方向(铅垂方向)。The device manufacturing system 1 is described below with reference to FIG1 . FIG1 shows an orthogonal coordinate system in which the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction are orthogonal to each other. The X direction is the conveying direction of the substrate P in the horizontal plane, and is the direction connecting the supply roll FR1 and the recovery roll FR2. The Y direction is the direction orthogonal to the X direction in the horizontal plane, and is the width direction of the substrate P. The Y direction is the axial direction of the supply roll FR1 and the recovery roll FR2. The Z direction is the direction orthogonal to the X direction and the Y direction (vertical direction).

器件制造系统1具有:供给基板P的基板供给装置2;对由基板供给装置2供给的基板P实施各种处理的处理装置U1~Un;对由处理装置U1~Un实施了处理的基板P进行回收的基板回收装置4;和控制器件制造系统1的各装置的上级控制装置(控制部)5。The device manufacturing system 1 includes: a substrate supply device 2 for supplying a substrate P; processing devices U1 to Un for performing various processes on the substrate P supplied by the substrate supply device 2; a substrate recovery device 4 for recovering the substrate P processed by the processing devices U1 to Un; and an upper control device (control unit) 5 for controlling each device of the device manufacturing system 1.

在基板供给装置2上能够旋转地安装有供给用卷FR1。基板供给装置2具有:从所安装的供给用卷FR1送出基板P的驱动辊R1;和调整基板P的宽度方向(Y方向)上的位置的边缘位置控制器EPC1。驱动辊R1边夹持基板P的表背两面边旋转,将基板P沿从供给用卷FR1朝向回收用卷FR2的搬送方向(+X方向)送出,由此将基板P向处理装置U1~Un供给。此时,边缘位置控制器EPC1以使基板P的宽度方向上的端部的边缘处的位置相对于目标位置收束于±十几μm~几十μm左右的范围的方式,使基板P沿宽度方向移动,来修正基板P的宽度方向上的位置。A supply roll FR1 is rotatably mounted on the substrate supply device 2. The substrate supply device 2 comprises: a driving roller R1 that delivers the substrate P from the mounted supply roll FR1; and an edge position controller EPC1 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction). The driving roller R1 rotates while clamping the front and back surfaces of the substrate P, and delivers the substrate P in the conveying direction (+X direction) from the supply roll FR1 toward the recovery roll FR2, thereby supplying the substrate P to the processing devices U1 to Un. At this time, the edge position controller EPC1 moves the substrate P in the width direction so that the position of the edge of the end portion of the substrate P in the width direction is converged to a range of about ± a dozen μm to several tens of μm relative to the target position, thereby correcting the position of the substrate P in the width direction.

在基板回收装置4上能够旋转地安装有回收用卷FR2。基板回收装置4具有:将处理后的基板P向回收用卷FR2侧牵引的驱动辊R2;和调整基板P的宽度方向(Y方向)上的位置的边缘位置控制器EPC2。基板回收装置4通过驱动辊R2边夹持基板P的表背两面边旋转而将基板P沿搬送方向牵引,并且使回收用卷FR2旋转,由此将基板P卷起。此时,边缘位置控制器EPC2与边缘位置控制器EPC1同样地构成,修正基板P的宽度方向上的位置,以避免基板P的宽度方向的端部边缘在宽度方向上产生偏差。A recovery roll FR2 is rotatably mounted on the substrate recovery device 4. The substrate recovery device 4 comprises: a driving roller R2 for pulling the processed substrate P toward the recovery roll FR2; and an edge position controller EPC2 for adjusting the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction). The substrate recovery device 4 pulls the substrate P in the conveying direction by rotating the driving roller R2 while clamping the front and back surfaces of the substrate P, and rotates the recovery roll FR2, thereby rolling up the substrate P. At this time, the edge position controller EPC2 is constructed in the same manner as the edge position controller EPC1, and corrects the position of the substrate P in the width direction to avoid deviation of the end edge of the substrate P in the width direction in the width direction.

处理装置U1是对从基板供给装置2供给的基板P的表面涂敷感光性功能液的涂敷装置。作为感光性功能液,使用例如光致抗蚀剂、感光性硅烷耦合剂、UV固化树脂液、感光性电镀还原溶液等。处理装置U1从基板P的搬送方向的上游侧按顺序设有涂敷机构Gp1和干燥机构Gp2。涂敷机构Gp1具有供基板P卷绕的压辊DR1、和与压辊DR1相对的涂敷辊DR2。涂敷机构Gp1在将供给的基板P卷绕于压辊DR1的状态下,通过压辊DR1及涂敷辊DR2来夹持基板P。并且,涂敷机构Gp1通过使压辊DR1及涂敷辊DR2旋转,来使基板P边沿搬送方向移动边由涂敷辊DR2涂敷感光性功能液。干燥机构Gp2喷吹热风或干燥空气等干燥用空气,来除去感光性功能液中包含的溶质(溶剂或水),使涂敷有感光性功能液的基板P干燥,由此在基板P上形成感光性功能层。The processing device U1 is a coating device that applies a photosensitive functional liquid to the surface of the substrate P supplied from the substrate supply device 2. As the photosensitive functional liquid, for example, a photoresist, a photosensitive silane coupling agent, a UV curing resin liquid, a photosensitive electroplating reduction solution, etc. are used. The processing device U1 is provided with a coating mechanism Gp1 and a drying mechanism Gp2 in order from the upstream side of the conveying direction of the substrate P. The coating mechanism Gp1 has a pressure roller DR1 for winding the substrate P, and a coating roller DR2 opposite to the pressure roller DR1. The coating mechanism Gp1 clamps the substrate P by the pressure roller DR1 and the coating roller DR2 while winding the supplied substrate P around the pressure roller DR1. In addition, the coating mechanism Gp1 rotates the pressure roller DR1 and the coating roller DR2, so that the substrate P is coated with the photosensitive functional liquid by the coating roller DR2 while moving in the conveying direction. The drying mechanism Gp2 blows drying air such as hot air or dry air to remove the solute (solvent or water) contained in the photosensitive functional liquid, thereby drying the substrate P coated with the photosensitive functional liquid, thereby forming a photosensitive functional layer on the substrate P.

处理装置U2是为了使形成在基板P的表面上的感光性功能层稳定而将从处理装置U1搬送的基板P加热至规定温度(例如,几十℃~120℃左右)的加热装置。处理装置U2从基板P的搬送方向的上游侧按顺序设有加热腔室HA1和冷却腔室HA2。加热腔室HA1在其内部设有多个辊及多个空气翻转杆(air turn bar),多个辊及多个空气翻转杆构成了基板P的搬送路径。多个辊以与基板P的背面转动接触的方式设置,多个空气翻转杆以非接触状态设于基板P的表面侧。多个辊及多个空气翻转杆为了加长基板P的搬送路径而配置为蜿蜒状的搬送路径。在加热腔室HA1内通过的基板P边被沿着蜿蜒状的搬送路径搬送边被加热至规定温度。冷却腔室HA2为了使加热腔室HA1中加热后的基板P的温度与后续工序(处理装置U3)的环境温度一致,而将基板P冷却至环境温度。冷却腔室HA2在其内部设有多个辊,多个辊与加热腔室HA1同样地,为了加长基板P的搬送路径而配置为蜿蜒状的搬送路径。在冷却腔室HA2内通过的基板P边被沿着蜿蜒状的搬送路径搬送边被冷却。在冷却腔室HA2的搬送方向上的下流侧设有驱动辊R3,驱动辊R3边夹持从冷却腔室HA2通过后的基板P边旋转,由此将基板P朝向处理装置U3供给。The processing device U2 is a heating device that heats the substrate P conveyed from the processing device U1 to a specified temperature (for example, several tens of degrees Celsius to about 120 degrees Celsius) in order to stabilize the photosensitive functional layer formed on the surface of the substrate P. The processing device U2 is provided with a heating chamber HA1 and a cooling chamber HA2 in order from the upstream side of the conveying direction of the substrate P. The heating chamber HA1 is provided with a plurality of rollers and a plurality of air turn bars inside thereof, and the plurality of rollers and the plurality of air turn bars constitute the conveying path of the substrate P. The plurality of rollers are arranged in a manner of rotationally contacting with the back side of the substrate P, and the plurality of air turn bars are arranged on the surface side of the substrate P in a non-contact state. The plurality of rollers and the plurality of air turn bars are configured as a serpentine conveying path in order to lengthen the conveying path of the substrate P. The substrate P passing through the heating chamber HA1 is heated to a specified temperature while being conveyed along the serpentine conveying path. The cooling chamber HA2 cools the substrate P to the ambient temperature in order to make the temperature of the substrate P heated in the heating chamber HA1 consistent with the ambient temperature of the subsequent process (processing device U3). The cooling chamber HA2 is provided with a plurality of rollers therein, and the plurality of rollers are configured as a serpentine conveying path in order to lengthen the conveying path of the substrate P, similarly to the heating chamber HA1. The substrate P passing through the cooling chamber HA2 is cooled while being conveyed along the serpentine conveying path. A driving roller R3 is provided on the downstream side in the conveying direction of the cooling chamber HA2, and the driving roller R3 rotates while clamping the substrate P after passing through the cooling chamber HA2, thereby supplying the substrate P toward the processing device U3.

处理装置(基板处理装置)U3是对从处理装置U2供给的、在表面形成有感光性功能层的基板P投影曝光显示器面板用的电路或布线等的图案的曝光装置。详情将在后述,处理装置U3将照明光束照明于透射型的光罩M,将通过对光罩M照明照明光束而得到的投影光束向卷绕于旋转滚筒(支承滚筒)25的外周面一部分上的基板P投影曝光。处理装置U3具有将从处理装置U2供给的基板P向搬送方向的下流侧输送的驱动辊R4、和调整基板P的宽度方向(Y方向)上的位置的边缘位置控制器EPC3。驱动辊R4边夹持基板P的表背两面边旋转,将基板P向搬送方向的下流侧送出,由此将基板P朝向曝光位置供给。边缘位置控制器EPC3与边缘位置控制器EPC1同样地构成,以使曝光位置处的基板P的宽度方向成为目标位置的方式,修正基板P的宽度方向上的位置。另外,处理装置U3具有两组驱动辊R5、R6,在对曝光后的基板P赋予了松弛DL的状态下,将基板P向搬送方向的下流侧输送。两组驱动辊R5、R6在基板P的搬送方向上隔开规定间隔地配置。驱动辊R5夹持着搬送的基板P的上游侧而旋转,驱动辊R6夹持着搬送的基板P的下流侧而旋转,由此将基板P朝向处理装置U4供给。此时,基板P由于被赋予了松弛DL,所以能够吸收在与驱动辊R6相比的搬送方向的下流侧产生的搬送速度的变动,从而能够阻绝因搬送速度的变动导致的对基板P的曝光处理的影响。另外,在处理装置U3内,设有为了使光罩M的光罩图案的一部分的像与基板P相对地对位(对准)而对预先形成于基板P上的对准标记等进行检测的对准显微镜AM1、AM2。The processing device (substrate processing device) U3 is an exposure device that projects a pattern of a circuit or wiring for a display panel onto a substrate P supplied from the processing device U2 and having a photosensitive functional layer formed on the surface. The details will be described later. The processing device U3 illuminates the transmission type mask M with an illumination light beam, and projects the projection light beam obtained by illuminating the mask M with the illumination light beam onto the substrate P wound on a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum (supporting drum) 25 for exposure. The processing device U3 has a driving roller R4 that transports the substrate P supplied from the processing device U2 to the downstream side in the conveying direction, and an edge position controller EPC3 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction). The driving roller R4 rotates while clamping the front and back surfaces of the substrate P, and sends the substrate P to the downstream side in the conveying direction, thereby supplying the substrate P toward the exposure position. The edge position controller EPC3 is configured in the same manner as the edge position controller EPC1, and corrects the position of the substrate P in the width direction in such a way that the width direction of the substrate P at the exposure position becomes the target position. In addition, the processing device U3 has two sets of driving rollers R5 and R6, which convey the substrate P to the downstream side in the conveying direction while giving a slack DL to the exposed substrate P. The two sets of driving rollers R5 and R6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the conveying direction of the substrate P. The driving roller R5 rotates while clamping the upstream side of the conveyed substrate P, and the driving roller R6 rotates while clamping the downstream side of the conveyed substrate P, thereby supplying the substrate P toward the processing device U4. At this time, since the substrate P is given a slack DL, it can absorb the change in conveying speed generated on the downstream side of the conveying direction compared with the driving roller R6, thereby preventing the influence of the change in conveying speed on the exposure processing of the substrate P. In addition, in the processing device U3, there are provided alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 for detecting alignment marks pre-formed on the substrate P in order to align the image of a part of the mask pattern of the mask M with the substrate P relative to each other.

处理装置U4是对从处理装置U3搬送的曝光后的基板P进行湿式的显影处理、非电解镀层处理等的湿式处理装置。处理装置U4在其内部具有沿铅垂方向(Z方向)分层化的三个处理槽BT1、BT2、BT3、和对基板P进行搬送的多个辊。多个辊以使基板P从三个处理槽BT1、BT2、BT3的内部通过的方式配置。在处理槽BT3的搬送方向上的下流侧设有驱动辊R7,驱动辊R7边夹持从处理槽BT3通过后的基板P边旋转,由此将基板P朝向处理装置U5供给。The processing device U4 is a wet processing device that performs wet development processing, non-electrolytic plating processing, etc. on the exposed substrate P transported from the processing device U3. The processing device U4 has three processing tanks BT1, BT2, and BT3 layered in the vertical direction (Z direction) and a plurality of rollers for transporting the substrate P. The plurality of rollers are arranged in such a way that the substrate P passes through the inside of the three processing tanks BT1, BT2, and BT3. A driving roller R7 is provided on the downstream side of the processing tank BT3 in the transport direction, and the driving roller R7 rotates while clamping the substrate P after passing through the processing tank BT3, thereby supplying the substrate P toward the processing device U5.

虽然省略图示,但处理装置U5是使从处理装置U4搬送的基板P干燥的干燥装置。处理装置U5将在处理装置U4中进行湿式处理后的基板P上所附着的水分含量调整为规定的水分含量。通过处理装置U5干燥后的基板P经由若干处理装置而被搬送到处理装置Un。而且,在处理装置Un中进行处理后,基板P被基板回收装置4的回收用卷FR2卷起。Although not shown in the figure, the processing device U5 is a drying device that dries the substrate P transported from the processing device U4. The processing device U5 adjusts the moisture content attached to the substrate P after the wet processing in the processing device U4 to a predetermined moisture content. The substrate P dried by the processing device U5 is transported to the processing device Un via several processing devices. And, after being processed in the processing device Un, the substrate P is rolled up by the recovery roll FR2 of the substrate recovery device 4.

上级控制装置5对基板供给装置2、基板回收装置4及多个处理装置U1~Un进行统括控制。上级控制装置5控制基板供给装置2及基板回收装置4,来将基板P从基板供给装置2朝向基板回收装置4搬送。另外,上级控制装置5与基板P的搬送同步地控制多个处理装置U1~Un,来执行针对基板P的各种处理。该上级控制装置5包括计算机和存储有程序的存储介质,该计算机通过执行存储介质所存储的程序,而作为本第1实施方式的上级控制装置5发挥功能。The upper control device 5 performs overall control over the substrate supply device 2, the substrate recovery device 4, and the plurality of processing devices U1 to Un. The upper control device 5 controls the substrate supply device 2 and the substrate recovery device 4 to transport the substrate P from the substrate supply device 2 to the substrate recovery device 4. In addition, the upper control device 5 controls the plurality of processing devices U1 to Un in synchronization with the transport of the substrate P to perform various processes on the substrate P. The upper control device 5 includes a computer and a storage medium storing a program, and the computer functions as the upper control device 5 of the first embodiment by executing the program stored in the storage medium.

此外,在第1实施方式的器件制造系统1中,示出了从供给用卷FR1送出的基板P依次经由n台的处理装置U1~Un直至卷收于回收用卷FR2的例子,但不限于该结构。例如,器件制造系统1也可以为将从供给用卷FR1送出的基板P经由1台处理装置而卷收于回收用卷FR2的结构。此时,在对基板P进行不同处理的情况下,使用基板供给装置2及基板回收装置4,将基板P再次对不同的处理装置供给。In addition, in the device manufacturing system 1 of the first embodiment, an example is shown in which the substrate P sent from the supply roll FR1 passes through n processing devices U1 to Un in sequence until it is rolled up on the recovery roll FR2, but it is not limited to this structure. For example, the device manufacturing system 1 may also be a structure in which the substrate P sent from the supply roll FR1 passes through one processing device and is rolled up on the recovery roll FR2. At this time, when the substrate P is subjected to different processing, the substrate supply device 2 and the substrate recovery device 4 are used to supply the substrate P to different processing devices again.

<简化的器件制造系统><Simplified device manufacturing system>

接下来,为了容易地掌握本发明的特征部分,参照图2来说明将图1的器件制造系统1简化后的器件制造系统1。图2是表示将第1实施方式的器件制造系统1简化时的结构的图。如图2所示,简化后的器件制造系统1具有基板供给装置2、作为曝光装置的处理装置U3(以下,称作曝光装置)、基板回收装置4和上级控制装置5。此外,在图2中,为X方向、Y方向及Z方向正交的正交坐标系,是与图1相同的正交坐标系。另外,在简化后的器件制造系统1中,基板供给装置2为省略了边缘位置控制器EPC1的结构。其原因在于,在曝光装置U3中设有边缘位置控制器EPC3。首先,参照图2来说明基板供给装置2。Next, in order to easily understand the characteristic part of the present invention, the device manufacturing system 1 after simplifying the device manufacturing system 1 of Figure 1 is described with reference to Figure 2. Figure 2 is a diagram showing the structure of the device manufacturing system 1 of the first embodiment when it is simplified. As shown in Figure 2, the simplified device manufacturing system 1 has a substrate supply device 2, a processing device U3 as an exposure device (hereinafter referred to as an exposure device), a substrate recovery device 4, and an upper control device 5. In addition, in Figure 2, an orthogonal coordinate system in which the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction are orthogonal is the same orthogonal coordinate system as Figure 1. In addition, in the simplified device manufacturing system 1, the substrate supply device 2 is a structure in which the edge position controller EPC1 is omitted. The reason is that the edge position controller EPC3 is provided in the exposure device U3. First, the substrate supply device 2 is described with reference to Figure 2.

<基板供给装置><Substrate supply device>

基板供给装置2具有安装供给用卷FR1的第1轴承部111、和使第1轴承部111升降的第1升降机构112。另外,基板供给装置2具有进入角度检测部114,进入角度检测部114与上级控制装置5连接。在此,在第1实施方式中,上级控制装置5作为基板供给装置2的控制装置(控制部)发挥功能。此外,也可以构成为,作为基板供给装置2的控制装置,设置控制基板供给装置2的下级控制装置,由下级控制装置控制基板供给装置2。The substrate supply device 2 has a first bearing portion 111 on which the supply roll FR1 is mounted, and a first lifting mechanism 112 for lifting and lowering the first bearing portion 111. In addition, the substrate supply device 2 has an entry angle detection portion 114, and the entry angle detection portion 114 is connected to the upper control device 5. Here, in the first embodiment, the upper control device 5 functions as a control device (control portion) of the substrate supply device 2. In addition, it can also be configured that, as the control device of the substrate supply device 2, a lower control device for controlling the substrate supply device 2 is provided, and the substrate supply device 2 is controlled by the lower control device.

第1轴承部111能够旋转地轴支承供给用卷FR1。轴支承在第1轴承部111上的供给用卷FR1当将基板P朝向曝光装置U3供给(送出)时,与基板P的送出量相应地,供给用卷FR1的卷径逐渐变小。因此,将基板P从供给用卷FR1送出的位置根据基板P被送出的送出量而变化。The first bearing 111 is rotatably supported by the supply roll FR1. When the supply roll FR1 supported by the first bearing 111 supplies (delivers) the substrate P toward the exposure device U3, the roll diameter of the supply roll FR1 gradually decreases in accordance with the delivery amount of the substrate P. Therefore, the position where the substrate P is delivered from the supply roll FR1 changes according to the delivery amount of the substrate P delivered.

第1升降机构112设在设置面E与第1轴承部111之间。第1升降机构112使第1轴承部111与供给用卷FR1一起沿Z方向(铅垂方向)移动。第1升降机构112与上级控制装置5连接,上级控制装置5通过第1升降机构112来使第1轴承部111沿Z方向移动,由此能够使基板P从供给用卷FR1送出的位置成为规定位置。The first lifting mechanism 112 is provided between the installation surface E and the first bearing portion 111. The first lifting mechanism 112 moves the first bearing portion 111 along the Z direction (vertical direction) together with the supply roll FR1. The first lifting mechanism 112 is connected to the upper control device 5, and the upper control device 5 moves the first bearing portion 111 along the Z direction through the first lifting mechanism 112, thereby enabling the position where the substrate P is delivered from the supply roll FR1 to become a predetermined position.

进入角度检测部114检测进入到后述的曝光装置U3的搬送辊127的基板P的进入角度θ1。进入角度检测部114设在搬送辊127周围。在此,进入角度θ1是在XZ面内,从搬送辊127的中心轴通过的沿铅垂方向延伸的直线(与Z轴平行)与搬送辊127的上游侧的基板P所成的角度。进入角度检测部114向所连接的上级控制装置5输出检测结果。The entry angle detection unit 114 detects the entry angle θ1 of the substrate P entering the conveying roller 127 of the exposure device U3 described later. The entry angle detection unit 114 is provided around the conveying roller 127. Here, the entry angle θ1 is the angle between a straight line (parallel to the Z axis) extending in the vertical direction passing through the center axis of the conveying roller 127 in the XZ plane and the substrate P on the upstream side of the conveying roller 127. The entry angle detection unit 114 outputs the detection result to the connected upper control device 5.

上级控制装置5基于进入角度检测部114的检测结果来控制第1升降机构112。具体地说,上级控制装置5以使进入角度θ1成为预先规定的目标进入角度的方式,控制第1升降机构112。也就是说,若基板P从供给用卷FR1的送出量变多,则供给用卷FR1的卷径变小,由此相对于目标进入角度的进入角度θ1变大。因此,上级控制装置5使第1升降机构112向Z方向的下方侧移动(下降),由此,减小进入角度θ1,以使进入角度θ1成为目标进入角度的方式进行修正。像这样,上级控制装置5基于进入角度检测部114的检测结果,以使进入角度θ1成为目标进入角度的方式,对第1升降机构112进行反馈控制。因此,由于基板供给装置2能够相对于搬送辊127始终以目标进入角度供给基板P,所以能够减少因进入角度θ1的变化而对基板P带来的影响。此外,作为反馈控制,可以是P控制、PI控制、PID控制等任意控制。The upper control device 5 controls the first lifting mechanism 112 based on the detection result of the entry angle detection unit 114. Specifically, the upper control device 5 controls the first lifting mechanism 112 in such a way that the entry angle θ1 becomes a predetermined target entry angle. That is, if the amount of substrate P fed from the supply roll FR1 increases, the roll diameter of the supply roll FR1 becomes smaller, thereby increasing the entry angle θ1 relative to the target entry angle. Therefore, the upper control device 5 moves the first lifting mechanism 112 to the lower side of the Z direction (descends), thereby reducing the entry angle θ1, and correcting the entry angle θ1 to the target entry angle. In this way, the upper control device 5 performs feedback control on the first lifting mechanism 112 based on the detection result of the entry angle detection unit 114 so that the entry angle θ1 becomes the target entry angle. Therefore, since the substrate supply device 2 can always supply the substrate P at the target entry angle relative to the conveying roller 127, the influence of the change in the entry angle θ1 on the substrate P can be reduced. In addition, as feedback control, any control such as P control, PI control, and PID control may be used.

<曝光装置(基板处理装置)><Exposure equipment (substrate processing equipment)>

接着,同时参照图3来说明图2所示的曝光装置U3。曝光装置U3包括位置调整单元120、曝光单元121、驱动单元122(参照图3)、推压机构130和减振台(防振装置)131。减振台131设在设置面E上,减少来自设置面E的振动(所谓地面振动)传递到曝光单元121主体。位置调整单元120设在设置面E上,包含图1所示的上述的边缘位置控制器EPC3而构成。位置调整单元120在X方向上与基板供给装置2相邻地设置。曝光单元121设在减振台131上,在X方向上隔着位置调整单元120而设于基板供给装置2的相反侧。驱动单元122(参照图3)设在设置面E上,在Y方向上与曝光单元121相邻地设置。也就是说,位置调整单元120、曝光单元121及驱动单元122在设置面E上设于不同位置。另外,曝光单元121与位置调整单元120及驱动单元122(参照图3)在机械上为非结合状态(非接触的独立状态)。Next, the exposure device U3 shown in FIG. 2 is described with reference to FIG. 3 . The exposure device U3 includes a position adjustment unit 120, an exposure unit 121, a drive unit 122 (refer to FIG. 3 ), a push mechanism 130, and a vibration reduction table (vibration-proof device) 131. The vibration reduction table 131 is provided on the installation surface E to reduce the transmission of vibration (so-called floor vibration) from the installation surface E to the main body of the exposure unit 121. The position adjustment unit 120 is provided on the installation surface E and is configured to include the above-mentioned edge position controller EPC3 shown in FIG. 1 . The position adjustment unit 120 is provided adjacent to the substrate supply device 2 in the X direction. The exposure unit 121 is provided on the vibration reduction table 131 and is provided on the opposite side of the substrate supply device 2 in the X direction across the position adjustment unit 120. The drive unit 122 (refer to FIG. 3 ) is provided on the installation surface E and is provided adjacent to the exposure unit 121 in the Y direction. That is, the position adjustment unit 120, the exposure unit 121, and the drive unit 122 are provided at different positions on the installation surface E. In addition, the exposure unit 121 is in a mechanically non-coupled state (non-contact independent state) with the position adjustment unit 120 and the driving unit 122 (see FIG. 3 ).

由以上可知,位置调整单元120及驱动单元122设在设置面E上,另一方面,曝光单元121经由减振台131而设在设置面E上。因此,曝光单元121成为与位置调整单元120及驱动单元122不同的振动模式。换言之,曝光单元121以从位置调整单元120及驱动单元122在振动传输上阻绝的状态(难以相互传输振动的状态,即有效隔绝振动的状态)设置。As can be seen from the above, the position adjustment unit 120 and the driving unit 122 are provided on the installation surface E, while the exposure unit 121 is provided on the installation surface E via the vibration reduction table 131. Therefore, the exposure unit 121 becomes a vibration mode different from that of the position adjustment unit 120 and the driving unit 122. In other words, the exposure unit 121 is provided in a state where the position adjustment unit 120 and the driving unit 122 are blocked from vibration transmission (a state where vibration is difficult to be transmitted to each other, that is, a state where vibration is effectively isolated).

另外,曝光装置U3具有检测基板P的位置的第1基板检测部123及第2基板检测部124。第1基板检测部123及第2基板检测部124与上级控制装置5连接。此外,在曝光装置U3中,与基板供给装置2同样地,上级控制装置5也作为曝光装置U3的控制装置(控制部)发挥功能。此外,也可以构成为,作为曝光装置U3的控制装置,设置控制曝光装置U3的下级控制装置,由下级控制装置控制曝光装置U3。In addition, the exposure device U3 has a first substrate detection unit 123 and a second substrate detection unit 124 for detecting the position of the substrate P. The first substrate detection unit 123 and the second substrate detection unit 124 are connected to the upper control device 5. In addition, in the exposure device U3, similarly to the substrate supply device 2, the upper control device 5 also functions as a control device (control unit) of the exposure device U3. In addition, it can also be configured so that as a control device of the exposure device U3, a lower control device for controlling the exposure device U3 is provided, and the exposure device U3 is controlled by the lower control device.

<位置调整单元><Position adjustment unit>

如图2所示,位置调整单元120具有基台125、上述的边缘位置控制器EPC3(宽度方向移动机构)和固定辊126。基台125设在设置面E上,支承边缘位置控制器EPC3及固定辊126。基台125也可以为具有减振功能的减振台。在该基台125上,设有将基台125的位置沿Y方向或绕Z轴的旋转方向调整的基台位置调整机构128。基台位置调整机构128与上级控制装置5连接,上级控制装置5能够通过控制基台位置调整机构128来一起调整设置在基台125上的边缘位置控制器EPC3及固定辊126的位置。也就是说,基台位置调整机构128作为相对于曝光单元121沿Y方向调整固定辊126的位置的辊位置调整机构发挥功能。As shown in FIG. 2 , the position adjustment unit 120 includes a base 125, the edge position controller EPC3 (width direction moving mechanism) and a fixed roller 126. The base 125 is provided on the installation surface E, and supports the edge position controller EPC3 and the fixed roller 126. The base 125 may also be a vibration reduction table having a vibration reduction function. A base position adjustment mechanism 128 is provided on the base 125 for adjusting the position of the base 125 in the Y direction or in the rotation direction around the Z axis. The base position adjustment mechanism 128 is connected to the upper control device 5, and the upper control device 5 can adjust the positions of the edge position controller EPC3 and the fixed roller 126 provided on the base 125 together by controlling the base position adjustment mechanism 128. That is, the base position adjustment mechanism 128 functions as a roller position adjustment mechanism for adjusting the position of the fixed roller 126 in the Y direction relative to the exposure unit 121.

边缘位置控制器EPC3能够在基台125上沿基板P的宽度方向(Y方向)移动。边缘位置控制器EPC3具有包含设在基板P被搬送的搬送方向的最上游侧的搬送辊127在内的多个辊。搬送辊127将从基板供给装置2供给的基板P向位置调整单元120的内部引导。边缘位置控制器EPC3与上级控制装置5连接,基于第1基板检测部123的检测结果而被上级控制装置5控制。The edge position controller EPC3 can move on the base 125 in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P. The edge position controller EPC3 has a plurality of rollers including a conveying roller 127 provided at the most upstream side of the conveying direction in which the substrate P is conveyed. The conveying roller 127 guides the substrate P supplied from the substrate supply device 2 to the inside of the position adjustment unit 120. The edge position controller EPC3 is connected to the upper control device 5 and is controlled by the upper control device 5 based on the detection result of the first substrate detection unit 123.

固定辊126将由边缘位置控制器EPC3沿宽度方向进行位置调整后的基板P朝向曝光单元121引导。固定辊126能够旋转,且相对于基台125的位置是固定的。因此,通过由边缘位置控制器EPC3使基板P沿宽度方向移动,而能够调整进入到固定辊126的基板P的宽度方向上的位置。The fixed roller 126 guides the substrate P whose position is adjusted in the width direction by the edge position controller EPC3 toward the exposure unit 121. The fixed roller 126 is rotatable and its position relative to the base 125 is fixed. Therefore, by moving the substrate P in the width direction by the edge position controller EPC3, the position in the width direction of the substrate P entering the fixed roller 126 can be adjusted.

第1基板检测部123检测从边缘位置控制器EPC3搬送到固定辊126的基板P的宽度方向上的位置。第1基板检测部123固定在基台125上。因此,第1基板检测部123为与边缘位置控制器EPC3及固定辊126相同的振动模式。第1基板检测部123检测与固定辊126转动接触的基板P的端部的边缘的位置。第1基板检测部123向所连接的上级控制装置5输出检测结果。The first substrate detection unit 123 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed from the edge position controller EPC3 to the fixed roller 126. The first substrate detection unit 123 is fixed to the base 125. Therefore, the first substrate detection unit 123 has the same vibration mode as the edge position controller EPC3 and the fixed roller 126. The first substrate detection unit 123 detects the position of the edge of the end of the substrate P that is in rotational contact with the fixed roller 126. The first substrate detection unit 123 outputs the detection result to the connected upper control device 5.

第2基板检测部124检测从位置调整单元120供给到曝光单元121的基板P的位置。第2基板检测部124固定在设置有曝光单元121的减振台131上。因此,第2基板检测部124成为与曝光单元121相同的振动模式。第2基板检测部124设在曝光单元121的导入基板P的导入侧。具体地说,第2基板检测部124在设于曝光单元121的搬送方向上的最上游侧的引导辊28的上游侧的位置,与引导辊28相邻地设置。第2基板检测部124检测供给到曝光单元121的基板P的宽度方向(Y方向)及铅垂方向(Z方向)上的位置。第2基板检测部124向所连接的上级控制装置5输出检测结果。The second substrate detection unit 124 detects the position of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121. The second substrate detection unit 124 is fixed on the vibration reduction table 131 on which the exposure unit 121 is installed. Therefore, the second substrate detection unit 124 becomes the same vibration mode as the exposure unit 121. The second substrate detection unit 124 is provided on the introduction side of the introduction substrate P of the exposure unit 121. Specifically, the second substrate detection unit 124 is provided at a position on the upstream side of the guide roller 28 provided on the most upstream side in the conveying direction of the exposure unit 121, adjacent to the guide roller 28. The second substrate detection unit 124 detects the position of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121 in the width direction (Y direction) and the vertical direction (Z direction). The second substrate detection unit 124 outputs the detection result to the connected upper control device 5.

上级控制装置5基于第1基板检测部123的检测结果来控制边缘位置控制器EPC3。具体地说,上级控制装置5对根据由第1基板检测部123检测出的与固定辊126转动接触(进入固定辊126)的基板P的两端部的边缘(Y方向的两边缘)的位置求出的Y方向上的中心位置、和预先规定的第1目标位置(目标中心位置)之间的差值进行计算。然后,上级控制装置5以使该差值成为零的方式对边缘位置控制器EPC3进行反馈控制,使基板P沿宽度方向移动,将基板P相对于固定辊126在宽度方向上的中心位置修正为第1目标中心位置。因此,由于边缘位置控制器EPC3能够将基板P相对于固定辊126在宽度方向上的位置维持为第1目标位置,所以能够降低基板P相对于固定辊126在宽度方向上的位置偏移。此外,该情况下,作为反馈控制可以是P控制、PI控制、PID控制等任意控制。The upper control device 5 controls the edge position controller EPC3 based on the detection result of the first substrate detection unit 123. Specifically, the upper control device 5 calculates the difference between the center position in the Y direction obtained based on the position of the edges (two edges in the Y direction) of the two ends of the substrate P that are in rotational contact with the fixed roller 126 (entering the fixed roller 126) detected by the first substrate detection unit 123, and the predetermined first target position (target center position). Then, the upper control device 5 performs feedback control on the edge position controller EPC3 in such a way that the difference becomes zero, so that the substrate P moves in the width direction and the center position of the substrate P in the width direction relative to the fixed roller 126 is corrected to the first target center position. Therefore, since the edge position controller EPC3 can maintain the position of the substrate P in the width direction relative to the fixed roller 126 at the first target position, the position deviation of the substrate P in the width direction relative to the fixed roller 126 can be reduced. In addition, in this case, the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, PID control, etc.

另外,上级控制装置5基于第2基板检测部124的检测结果来控制基台位置调整机构128。具体地说,上级控制装置5对根据由第2基板检测部124检测出的基板P的宽度方向上的两端的位置求出的中心位置、和预先规定的第2目标中心位置之间的差值进行计算。然后,上级控制装置5以使该差值成为零的方式对基台位置调整机构128进行反馈控制,通过基台位置调整机构128来调整基台125的位置,由此,调整固定辊126相对于引导辊28在Y方向上的位置。此时,上级控制装置5以避免在基板P上产生扭曲及宽度方向上的位置偏移的方式,调整固定辊126的位置。例如,上级控制装置5以使固定辊126的轴向与引导辊28的轴向平行的方式来调整位置。并且,上级控制装置5通过基台位置调整机构128沿Y方向或绕Z轴的旋转方向调整固定辊126的位置,由此能够将供给到曝光单元121的基板P的宽度方向上的中心位置维持为第2目标中心位置,从而能够减少基板P的扭曲及宽度方向上的位置偏移。此外,该情况下,作为反馈控制,可以是P控制、PI控制、PID控制等任意控制。In addition, the upper control device 5 controls the base position adjustment mechanism 128 based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit 124. Specifically, the upper control device 5 calculates the difference between the center position obtained based on the positions of the two ends of the substrate P in the width direction detected by the second substrate detection unit 124 and the predetermined second target center position. Then, the upper control device 5 performs feedback control on the base position adjustment mechanism 128 in such a way that the difference becomes zero, and adjusts the position of the base 125 through the base position adjustment mechanism 128, thereby adjusting the position of the fixed roller 126 relative to the guide roller 28 in the Y direction. At this time, the upper control device 5 adjusts the position of the fixed roller 126 in such a way as to avoid distortion and positional displacement in the width direction on the substrate P. For example, the upper control device 5 adjusts the position in such a way that the axial direction of the fixed roller 126 is parallel to the axial direction of the guide roller 28. Furthermore, the upper control device 5 adjusts the position of the fixed roller 126 along the Y direction or the rotation direction around the Z axis through the base position adjustment mechanism 128, thereby maintaining the center position in the width direction of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121 at the second target center position, thereby reducing the distortion and positional deviation in the width direction of the substrate P. In addition, in this case, the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, PID control, etc.

像这样,位置调整单元120能够将供给到固定辊126的基板P的宽度方向上的位置修正为第1目标位置,能够将供给到曝光单元121的引导辊28的基板P的位置修正为第2目标位置。In this way, the position adjustment unit 120 can correct the position in the width direction of the substrate P supplied to the fixed roller 126 to the first target position, and can correct the position of the substrate P supplied to the guide roller 28 of the exposure unit 121 to the second target position.

此外,在第1实施方式中,修正从位置调整单元120供给到曝光单元121的基板P的位置,但不限于该结构,例如,也可以修正从基板供给装置2供给到位置调整单元120的基板P的位置。该情况下,可以在搬送辊127的搬送方向上的上游侧设置基板检测部的同时,设置调整供给用卷FR1的位置的卷位置调整机构。并且,上级控制装置5基于基板检测部的检测结果来控制卷位置调整机构,由此来调整供给用卷FR1。同样地,也可以修正从曝光单元121供给到基板回收装置4的基板P的位置。In addition, in the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121 is corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this structure. For example, the position of the substrate P supplied from the substrate supply device 2 to the position adjustment unit 120 may be corrected. In this case, a roll position adjustment mechanism for adjusting the position of the supply roll FR1 may be provided while a substrate detection unit is provided on the upstream side in the conveying direction of the conveying roller 127. And, the upper control device 5 controls the roll position adjustment mechanism based on the detection result of the substrate detection unit, thereby adjusting the supply roll FR1. Similarly, the position of the substrate P supplied from the exposure unit 121 to the substrate recovery device 4 may be corrected.

<曝光单元><Exposure unit>

接着,参照图2至图7来说明第1实施方式的曝光装置U3的曝光单元121的结构。图3是表示第1实施方式的曝光装置(基板处理装置)U3的一部分结构的图,图4是表示图3中的基板支承机构12的驱动部的结构的图。图5是表示第1实施方式的曝光单元121的整体结构的图。图6是表示图5所示的曝光单元121的照明区域IR及投影区域PA的配置的图。图7是表示图5所示的曝光单元121的投影光学系统PL的结构的图。Next, the structure of the exposure unit 121 of the exposure device U3 of the first embodiment is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 7. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the exposure device (substrate processing device) U3 of the first embodiment, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the structure of the drive unit of the substrate support mechanism 12 in FIG. 3. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall structure of the exposure unit 121 of the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the illumination area IR and the projection area PA of the exposure unit 121 shown in FIG. 5. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the structure of the projection optical system PL of the exposure unit 121 shown in FIG. 5.

图2至图5所示的曝光单元121是所谓扫描曝光装置,边通过构成基板支承机构(基板搬送机构)12的多个引导辊28和能够旋转的圆筒状的旋转滚筒25将基板P沿搬送方向(扫描方向)搬送,边将形成于平面状的光罩M上的光罩图案的像投影曝光到基板P的表面。此外,图3及图4是曝光单元121的从-X侧观察到的图,图5及图7为X方向、Y方向及Z方向正交的正交坐标系,是与图1相同的正交坐标系。The exposure unit 121 shown in FIGS. 2 to 5 is a so-called scanning exposure device, which projects and exposes the image of the mask pattern formed on the planar mask M onto the surface of the substrate P while conveying the substrate P in the conveying direction (scanning direction) by a plurality of guide rollers 28 constituting the substrate support mechanism (substrate conveying mechanism) 12 and a rotatable cylindrical rotating drum 25. In addition, FIGS. 3 and 4 are views of the exposure unit 121 viewed from the -X side, and FIGS. 5 and 7 are orthogonal coordinate systems in which the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction are orthogonal, which are the same orthogonal coordinate systems as FIG. 1 .

首先,说明曝光单元121中所使用的光罩M。光罩M制成为例如在平坦性好的玻璃板的一个面(光罩面P1)上以铬等遮光层形成有光罩图案的透射型的平面光罩,在保持于后述的光罩载台21上的状态下使用。光罩M具有没有形成光罩图案的图案非形成区域,在图案非形成区域处安装到光罩载台21上。光罩M能够相对于光罩载台21释放。First, the mask M used in the exposure unit 121 is described. The mask M is made of, for example, a transmissive flat mask in which a mask pattern is formed with a light shielding layer such as chrome on one surface (mask surface P1) of a glass plate with good flatness, and is used while being held on a mask stage 21 described later. The mask M has a pattern non-formation region where no mask pattern is formed, and is mounted on the mask stage 21 at the pattern non-formation region. The mask M can be released relative to the mask stage 21.

此外,光罩M可以形成有与一个显示器件对应的面板用图案的整体或一部分,也可以为形成有与多个显示器件对应的面板用图案的拼版。另外,在光罩M上,可以沿光罩M的扫描方向(X方向)重复形成有多个面板用图案,也可以沿与扫描方向正交的方向(Y方向)重复形成有多个小型的面板用图案。而且,光罩M还可以形成有第1显示器件的面板用图案和与第1显示器件相比尺寸等不同的第2显示器件的面板用图案。In addition, the mask M may be formed with the whole or part of the panel pattern corresponding to one display device, or may be a patchwork formed with panel patterns corresponding to multiple display devices. In addition, on the mask M, multiple panel patterns may be repeatedly formed along the scanning direction (X direction) of the mask M, or multiple small panel patterns may be repeatedly formed along the direction orthogonal to the scanning direction (Y direction). Moreover, the mask M may also be formed with a panel pattern for a first display device and a panel pattern for a second display device having a different size from the first display device.

如图3、图5所示,设置于减振台131上的曝光单元121除上述的对准显微镜AM1、AM2以外,还具有装置框架132、支承光罩载台21的光罩保持机构11、基板支承机构12、投影光学系统PL和下级控制装置(控制部)16。该曝光单元121接受来自照明机构13的照明光束EL1的照射,将从保持于光罩保持机构11的光罩M的光罩图案产生的透射光(成像光束)向支承于基板支承机构12的旋转滚筒25上的基板P投射,将光罩图案的一部分的投影像成像到基板P的表面。As shown in Fig. 3 and Fig. 5, the exposure unit 121 disposed on the vibration reduction table 131 has, in addition to the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 described above, a device frame 132, a mask holding mechanism 11 supporting the mask stage 21, a substrate supporting mechanism 12, a projection optical system PL, and a lower-level control device (control unit) 16. The exposure unit 121 receives irradiation from the illumination beam EL1 from the illumination mechanism 13, projects the transmitted light (imaging beam) generated from the mask pattern of the mask M held by the mask holding mechanism 11 onto the substrate P on the rotating drum 25 supported by the substrate supporting mechanism 12, and forms a projection image of a portion of the mask pattern onto the surface of the substrate P.

下级控制装置16控制曝光装置U3的各部分,使各部分执行处理。下级控制装置16可以是器件制造系统1的上级控制装置5的一部分或全部。另外,下级控制装置16可以是被上级控制装置5控制且与上级控制装置5不同的装置。下级控制装置16例如包含计算机。The lower-level control device 16 controls each part of the exposure device U3 so that each part performs processing. The lower-level control device 16 may be a part or all of the upper-level control device 5 of the device manufacturing system 1. In addition, the lower-level control device 16 may be a device that is controlled by the upper-level control device 5 and is different from the upper-level control device 5. The lower-level control device 16 includes, for example, a computer.

减振台131设在设置面E上并支承装置框架132。具体地说,如图3所示,减振台131包括在Y方向上设于外侧的第1减振台131a、和设于第1减振台131a内侧的第2减振台131b。The vibration-damping table 131 is provided on the installation surface E and supports the device frame 132. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 3, the vibration-damping table 131 includes a first vibration-damping table 131a provided outside in the Y direction and a second vibration-damping table 131b provided inside the first vibration-damping table 131a.

装置框架132设在第1减振台131a及第2减振台131b上,并支承光罩保持机构11、基板支承机构12、照明机构13及投影光学系统PL。装置框架132具有支承光罩保持机构11、照明机构13及投影光学系统PL的第1框架132a、和支承基板支承机构12的第2框架132b。第1框架132a及第2框架132b分别独立地设置,第1框架132a以覆盖第2框架132b的方式配置。第1框架132a设在第1减振台131a上,第2框架132b设在第2减振台131b上。The device frame 132 is provided on the first vibration-damping platform 131a and the second vibration-damping platform 131b, and supports the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate supporting mechanism 12, the lighting mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL. The device frame 132 includes a first frame 132a that supports the mask holding mechanism 11, the lighting mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL, and a second frame 132b that supports the substrate supporting mechanism 12. The first frame 132a and the second frame 132b are provided independently, and the first frame 132a is arranged to cover the second frame 132b. The first frame 132a is provided on the first vibration-damping platform 131a, and the second frame 132b is provided on the second vibration-damping platform 131b.

第1框架132a由设在第1减振台131a上的第1下方框架135、设在第1下方框架135的Z方向的上方的第1上方框架136、和立设在第1上方框架136的臂部137构成。第1下方框架135具有立设在第1减振台131a上的腿部135a、和支承于腿部135a的上表面部135b,在上表面部135b上经由保持部件143而支承有投影光学系统PL。保持部件143在XY面内观察时,通过配置于上表面部135b上的三处的基于金属球等的垫片部件145而被运动地(kinematically)支承。腿部135a配置在规定的部位,以使得后述的旋转滚筒25的旋转轴AX2沿Y方向穿插。The first frame 132a is composed of a first lower frame 135 provided on the first vibration-damping platform 131a, a first upper frame 136 provided above the first lower frame 135 in the Z direction, and an arm 137 provided upright on the first upper frame 136. The first lower frame 135 has a leg 135a provided upright on the first vibration-damping platform 131a, and an upper surface 135b supported by the leg 135a, and the projection optical system PL is supported on the upper surface 135b via a holding member 143. The holding member 143 is kinematically supported by spacer members 145 such as metal balls provided at three locations on the upper surface 135b when viewed in the XY plane. The leg 135a is provided at a predetermined position so that the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating drum 25 described later is inserted in the Y direction.

第1上方框架136也与第1下方框架135同样地,具有立设在上表面部135b上的腿部136a、和支承于腿部136a的上表面部136b,在上表面部136b上支承有光罩保持机构11(光罩载台21)。臂部137立设在上表面部136b上,以使照明机构13位于光罩保持机构11的上方的方式支承照明机构13。The first upper frame 136 also has a leg portion 136a erected on the upper surface portion 135b and an upper surface portion 136b supported by the leg portion 136a, similarly to the first lower frame 135. The upper surface portion 136b supports the mask holding mechanism 11 (mask carrier 21). The arm portion 137 is erected on the upper surface portion 136b to support the lighting mechanism 13 so that the lighting mechanism 13 is located above the mask holding mechanism 11.

第2框架132b由立设在第2减振台131b上的下表面部139、和在下表面部139上沿Y方向分隔地立设的一对轴承部140构成。在一对轴承部140上设有对成为旋转滚筒25的旋转中心的旋转轴AX2进行轴支承的空气轴承141。The second frame 132b is composed of a lower surface portion 139 erected on the second vibration-damping platform 131b and a pair of bearing portions 140 erected on the lower surface portion 139 and spaced apart in the Y direction. The pair of bearing portions 140 are provided with air bearings 141 that axially support the rotation axis AX2 that is the rotation center of the rotating drum 25.

光罩保持机构11具有:保持光罩M的光罩载台(光罩保持部件)21、用于使光罩载台21移动的未图示的移动机构(线性引导件、空气轴承等)、和用于向移动机构传递动力的传递部件23。光罩载台21构成为包围光罩M的图案形成区域的框状,通过设在驱动单元122上的光罩侧驱动部(马达等驱动源)22而在第1上方框架136的上表面部136b上沿成为扫描方向的X方向移动。从传递部件23传递的驱动力通过移动机构而供于光罩载台21的直线驱动。The mask holding mechanism 11 includes: a mask stage (mask holding member) 21 holding the mask M, a moving mechanism (linear guide, air bearing, etc.) (not shown) for moving the mask stage 21, and a transmission member 23 for transmitting power to the moving mechanism. The mask stage 21 is configured in a frame shape surrounding the pattern forming area of the mask M, and is moved along the X direction, which is the scanning direction, on the upper surface portion 136b of the first upper frame 136 by a mask side driving portion (a driving source such as a motor) 22 provided on the driving unit 122. The driving force transmitted from the transmission member 23 is provided for the linear drive of the mask stage 21 through the moving mechanism.

在本实施方式中,光罩载台21为了进行扫描曝光而沿X方向直线运动,因此,光罩侧驱动部(驱动源)22包括在支柱框架146上以沿X方向延伸设置地方式固定的线性马达的磁铁轨道(定子),传递部件23包括与该磁铁轨道以固定间隙相对的线性马达的线圈单元(动子)。此外,在图3中,在将投影光学系统PL支承于装置框架132侧的保持部件143上,设有对旋转滚筒25的外周面(或基板P的表面)中的、与基于投影光学系统PL进行曝光的曝光位置对应的表面的高度变化进行计测的位移传感器SG1;和从光罩载台21的下侧对光罩M的Z方向上的位置变化进行计测的位移传感器SG2。In the present embodiment, the mask stage 21 moves linearly in the X direction for scanning exposure, and therefore, the mask side drive unit (drive source) 22 includes a magnet track (stator) of a linear motor fixed on the support frame 146 in a manner extending in the X direction, and the transmission component 23 includes a coil unit (mover) of the linear motor opposite to the magnet track with a fixed gap. In addition, in FIG. 3, a displacement sensor SG1 is provided on the holding component 143 that supports the projection optical system PL on the side of the device frame 132, which measures the height change of the surface of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum 25 (or the surface of the substrate P) corresponding to the exposure position based on the projection optical system PL; and a displacement sensor SG2 is provided to measure the position change of the mask M in the Z direction from the lower side of the mask stage 21.

另一方面,如图2、图3所示,在大致半周范围内卷绕支承基板P的旋转滚筒25通过设于图3所示的驱动单元122的基板侧驱动部(旋转马达等驱动源)26而旋转。同时如图5所示,旋转滚筒25形成为圆筒形状,该圆筒形状具有以沿Y方向延伸的旋转轴AX2为中心的曲率半径为Rfa的外周面(圆周面)。在此,将包含旋转轴AX2的中心线且与YZ面平行的面设为中心面CL(参照图5)。旋转滚筒25的圆周面的一部分成为以规定的张力支承基板P的支承面P2。也就是说,旋转滚筒25以固定的张力在其支承面P2上卷绕基板P,由此能够将基板P以稳定的圆筒曲面状支承。On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the rotating drum 25 that winds and supports the substrate P in a roughly half-circumference range is rotated by the substrate-side driving section (driving source such as a rotating motor) 26 provided in the driving unit 122 shown in FIG. 3. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 5, the rotating drum 25 is formed into a cylindrical shape, and the cylindrical shape has an outer peripheral surface (circumferential surface) with a curvature radius of Rfa centered on the rotation axis AX2 extending along the Y direction. Here, the surface that includes the center line of the rotation axis AX2 and is parallel to the YZ plane is set as the center plane CL (refer to FIG. 5). A part of the circumferential surface of the rotating drum 25 becomes a supporting surface P2 that supports the substrate P with a specified tension. In other words, the rotating drum 25 winds the substrate P on its supporting surface P2 with a fixed tension, thereby being able to support the substrate P in a stable cylindrical curved surface shape.

通过两侧的轴承部140轴支承旋转轴AX2的各空气轴承141以非接触的状态旋转自如地轴支承旋转轴AX2。此外,在本实施方式中,在旋转滚筒25的两端通过空气轴承141支承旋转轴AX2,但也可以是使用高精度加工而成的滚珠或滚针的通常的轴承。如图2及图5所示,多个引导辊28隔着旋转滚筒25分别设于基板P的搬送方向的上游侧及下流侧。例如引导辊28共设有四个,两个配置于搬送方向的上游侧,两个配置于搬送方向的下流侧。Each air bearing 141 that axially supports the rotating shaft AX2 through the bearing parts 140 on both sides axially supports the rotating shaft AX2 rotatably in a non-contact state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the rotating shaft AX2 is supported by the air bearings 141 at both ends of the rotating drum 25, but it can also be a common bearing using a ball or needle roller processed with high precision. As shown in Figures 2 and 5, a plurality of guide rollers 28 are respectively arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side of the conveying direction of the substrate P across the rotating drum 25. For example, there are four guide rollers 28, two of which are arranged on the upstream side of the conveying direction, and two of which are arranged on the downstream side of the conveying direction.

因此,基板支承机构12通过两个引导辊28将从位置调整单元120搬送的基板P向旋转滚筒25引导。基板支承机构12通过基板侧驱动部26并经由旋转轴AX2使旋转滚筒25旋转,由此,将导入至旋转滚筒25的基板P边由旋转滚筒25的支承面P2支承边朝向引导辊28搬送。基板支承机构12将搬送到引导辊28的基板P朝向基板回收装置4引导。Therefore, the substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P conveyed from the position adjustment unit 120 toward the rotating drum 25 via the two guide rollers 28. The substrate support mechanism 12 rotates the rotating drum 25 via the rotating axis AX2 through the substrate side driving unit 26, thereby conveying the substrate P introduced into the rotating drum 25 toward the guide rollers 28 while being supported by the supporting surface P2 of the rotating drum 25. The substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P conveyed to the guide rollers 28 toward the substrate recovery device 4.

在此,参照图4来说明基板侧驱动部26的结构的一例。在图4中,在卷绕基板P的旋转滚筒25的至少一端侧,与旋转轴AX2同轴地固定设有半径与旋转滚筒25的外周表面25a的半径Rfa大致相同的圆板状的标尺板25c。在该标尺板25c的外周面上沿周向以固定间距形成有衍射光栅,通过由编码器计测用的读取头EH光学地检测该衍射光栅,来计测旋转滚筒25的旋转角度或旋转滚筒25的表面25a的周向上的移动量。由读取头EH计测的旋转滚筒25的旋转角度信息等也用作使旋转滚筒25旋转的马达的伺服控制的反馈信号。此外,在图4中,位移传感器SG1配置为计测基板P的表面的高度位置的位移(径向位移),但也可以配置为计测没有被基板P覆盖的旋转滚筒25的端部侧的区域25b的表面的高度位置的位移(径向位移)。Here, an example of the structure of the substrate-side driving unit 26 is described with reference to FIG. 4. In FIG. 4, a disc-shaped scale plate 25c having a radius substantially the same as the radius Rfa of the outer peripheral surface 25a of the rotating drum 25 is fixedly provided coaxially with the rotation axis AX2 on at least one end side of the rotating drum 25 on which the substrate P is wound. A diffraction grating is formed at a fixed interval in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the scale plate 25c, and the rotation angle of the rotating drum 25 or the circumferential movement amount of the surface 25a of the rotating drum 25 is measured by optically detecting the diffraction grating by the encoder measurement head EH. The rotation angle information of the rotating drum 25 measured by the reading head EH is also used as a feedback signal for the servo control of the motor that rotates the rotating drum 25. In addition, in FIG. 4, the displacement sensor SG1 is configured to measure the displacement (radial displacement) of the height position of the surface of the substrate P, but it can also be configured to measure the displacement (radial displacement) of the height position of the surface of the region 25b on the end side of the rotating drum 25 that is not covered by the substrate P.

在由空气轴承141轴支承的旋转轴AX2的端部侧,设有将产生绕旋转轴AX2的扭矩的旋转马达的磁铁单元Mur以环状排列而成的转子RT、和对旋转轴AX2赋予轴向推力的音圈马达用的磁铁单元MUs。在固定于图3中的支柱框架146的定子侧,设有以与转子RT周围的磁铁单元Mur相对的方式配置的线圈单元CUr、和以围绕磁铁单元MUs的方式卷成的线圈单元CUs。通过这样的结构,能够使与旋转轴AX2一体化的旋转滚筒25(及标尺板25c)通过对转子RT赋予的扭矩而平滑地旋转。On the end side of the rotating shaft AX2 supported by the air bearing 141, there is provided a rotor RT in which magnet units Mur of a rotating motor generating torque around the rotating shaft AX2 are arranged in a ring shape, and a magnet unit MUs for a voice coil motor that applies axial thrust to the rotating shaft AX2. On the stator side of the support frame 146 fixed to FIG. 3, there are provided a coil unit CUr arranged in a manner opposite to the magnet unit Mur around the rotor RT, and a coil unit CUs wound in a manner surrounding the magnet unit MUs. With such a structure, the rotating drum 25 (and the scale plate 25c) integrated with the rotating shaft AX2 can be smoothly rotated by the torque applied to the rotor RT.

另外,音圈马达(MUs、CUs)即使在旋转滚筒25的旋转中也会产生旋转轴AX2的方向(Y方向)上的推力,因此能够使旋转滚筒25(及标尺板25c)沿Y方向微动。由此,能够逐次修正扫描曝光中的基板P的Y方向上的微小的位置偏移。In addition, the voice coil motor (MUs, CUs) generates thrust in the direction of the rotation axis AX2 (Y direction) even during the rotation of the rotating drum 25, so that the rotating drum 25 (and the scale plate 25c) can be slightly moved in the Y direction. Thus, the slight positional deviation in the Y direction of the substrate P during scanning exposure can be corrected one by one.

此外,在图4的结构中,设有对旋转轴AX2的端面Tp的Y方向上的位移进行计测的位移传感器DT1、或对标尺板25c的端面的Y方向上的位移进行计测的位移传感器DT2,能够实时地依次计测扫描曝光中的旋转滚筒25的Y方向上的位置变化。因此,只要基于来自这些位移传感器DT1、DT2的计测信号对音圈马达(MUs、CUs)进行伺服控制,就能够高精度地将旋转滚筒25的Y方向上的位置定位。In addition, in the configuration of Fig. 4, a displacement sensor DT1 for measuring the displacement of the end surface Tp of the rotation axis AX2 in the Y direction, or a displacement sensor DT2 for measuring the displacement of the end surface of the scale plate 25c in the Y direction is provided, and the position change in the Y direction of the rotating drum 25 during scanning exposure can be measured sequentially in real time. Therefore, by servo-controlling the voice coil motors (MUs, CUs) based on the measurement signals from these displacement sensors DT1 and DT2, the position of the rotating drum 25 in the Y direction can be positioned with high accuracy.

在此,如图6所示,第1实施方式的曝光装置U3是假设为所谓多透镜方式的曝光装置。此外,在图6中,示出了保持于光罩载台21的光罩M上的照明区域IR(IR1~IR6)的从-Z侧观察到的平面图(图6的左图)、和支承于旋转滚筒25的基板P上的投影区域PA(PA1~PA6)的从+Z侧观察到的平面图(图6的右图)。图6中的附图标记Xs表示光罩载台21及旋转滚筒25的扫描方向(旋转方向)。多透镜方式的曝光装置U3向光罩M上的多个(第1实施方式中为例如六个)照明区域IR1~IR6分别照射照明光束EL1,将因各照明光束EL1被照明于各照明区域IR1~IR6而得到的多个投影光束EL2向基板P上的多个(第1实施方式中为例如六个)投影区域PA1~PA6投影曝光。Here, as shown in FIG6 , the exposure device U3 of the first embodiment is assumed to be a so-called multi-lens exposure device. In addition, FIG6 shows a plan view of the illumination area IR (IR1 to IR6) on the mask M held on the mask stage 21 as viewed from the -Z side (the left figure of FIG6 ), and a plan view of the projection area PA (PA1 to PA6) on the substrate P supported by the rotating drum 25 as viewed from the +Z side (the right figure of FIG6 ). The reference symbol Xs in FIG6 represents the scanning direction (rotation direction) of the mask stage 21 and the rotating drum 25. The multi-lens exposure device U3 irradiates the illumination light beam EL1 to the multiple (for example, six in the first embodiment) illumination areas IR1 to IR6 on the mask M, respectively, and projects the multiple projection light beams EL2 obtained by illuminating the illumination light beams EL1 on the respective illumination areas IR1 to IR6 to the multiple (for example, six in the first embodiment) projection areas PA1 to PA6 on the substrate P for exposure.

首先,说明由照明机构13照明的多个照明区域IR1~IR6。如图6所示,多个照明区域IR1~IR6隔着中心面CL沿基板P的扫描方向配置成两列,在扫描方向的上游侧的光罩M上配置有照明区域IR1、IR3及IR5,在扫描方向的下流侧的光罩M上配置有照明区域IR2、IR4及IR6。各照明区域IR1~IR6为具有沿光罩M的宽度方向(Y方向)延伸的平行的短边及长边的细长的梯形形状的区域。此时,梯形形状的各照明区域IR1~IR6为其短边位于中心面CL侧、其长边位于外侧的区域。奇数号的照明区域IR1、IR3及IR5沿Y方向隔开规定的间隔而配置。另外,偶数号的照明区域IR2、IR4及IR6沿Y方向隔开规定的间隔而配置。此时,照明区域IR2在Y方向上配置于照明区域IR1与照明区域IR3之间。同样地,照明区域IR3在Y方向上配置于照明区域IR2与照明区域IR4之间。照明区域IR4在Y方向上配置于照明区域IR3与照明区域IR5之间。照明区域IR5在Y方向上配置于照明区域IR4与照明区域IR6之间。各照明区域IR1~IR6在从光罩M的扫描方向观察时,以相邻的梯形形状的照明区域的斜边部的三角部重叠(overlap)的方式配置。此外,在第1实施方式中,各照明区域IR1~IR6为梯形形状的区域,但也可以为长方形状的区域。First, the multiple illumination areas IR1 to IR6 illuminated by the illumination mechanism 13 are described. As shown in FIG. 6 , the multiple illumination areas IR1 to IR6 are arranged in two rows along the scanning direction of the substrate P across the center plane CL, and the illumination areas IR1, IR3 and IR5 are arranged on the mask M on the upstream side of the scanning direction, and the illumination areas IR2, IR4 and IR6 are arranged on the mask M on the downstream side of the scanning direction. Each illumination area IR1 to IR6 is an elongated trapezoidal area having parallel short sides and long sides extending along the width direction (Y direction) of the mask M. At this time, each trapezoidal illumination area IR1 to IR6 is an area whose short side is located on the center plane CL side and whose long side is located on the outside. The odd-numbered illumination areas IR1, IR3 and IR5 are arranged at a predetermined interval along the Y direction. In addition, the even-numbered illumination areas IR2, IR4 and IR6 are arranged at a predetermined interval along the Y direction. At this time, the illumination area IR2 is arranged between the illumination area IR1 and the illumination area IR3 in the Y direction. Similarly, illumination region IR3 is arranged between illumination region IR2 and illumination region IR4 in the Y direction. Illumination region IR4 is arranged between illumination region IR3 and illumination region IR5 in the Y direction. Illumination region IR5 is arranged between illumination region IR4 and illumination region IR6 in the Y direction. When viewed from the scanning direction of mask M, each illumination region IR1 to IR6 is arranged so that the triangular portions of the hypotenuse portions of adjacent trapezoidal illumination regions overlap. In addition, in the first embodiment, each illumination region IR1 to IR6 is a trapezoidal region, but may be a rectangular region.

另外,光罩M具有形成有光罩图案的图案形成区域A3、和没有形成光罩图案的图案非形成区域A4。图案非形成区域A4是吸收照明光束EL1的低反射区域,并将图案形成区域A3以框状包围地配置。照明区域IR1~IR6以覆盖图案形成区域A3的Y方向上的整个宽度的方式配置。In addition, the mask M has a pattern forming area A3 where a mask pattern is formed, and a pattern non-forming area A4 where no mask pattern is formed. The pattern non-forming area A4 is a low-reflection area that absorbs the illumination light beam EL1, and is configured to surround the pattern forming area A3 in a frame shape. The illumination areas IR1 to IR6 are configured to cover the entire width of the pattern forming area A3 in the Y direction.

照明机构13射出向光罩M照明的照明光束EL1。照明机构13具有光源装置及照明光学系统IL。光源装置包含例如水银灯等灯光源、激光二极管或发光二极管(LED)等固体光源。光源装置射出的照明光是例如从灯光源射出的辉线(g线、h线、i线),KrF准分子激光(波长248nm)等远紫外光(DUV光)、ArF准分子激光(波长193nm)等。从光源装置射出的照明光的照度分布被均匀化,经由例如光纤等导光部件而导入到照明光学系统IL。The lighting mechanism 13 emits an illumination beam EL1 for illuminating the light shield M. The lighting mechanism 13 includes a light source device and an illumination optical system IL. The light source device includes, for example, a lamp light source such as a mercury lamp, a solid light source such as a laser diode or a light emitting diode (LED). The illumination light emitted by the light source device is, for example, a bright line (g line, h line, i line) emitted from a lamp light source, a far ultraviolet light (DUV light) such as a KrF excimer laser (wavelength 248nm), an ArF excimer laser (wavelength 193nm), etc. The illumination distribution of the illumination light emitted from the light source device is uniformized and introduced into the illumination optical system IL via a light guide component such as an optical fiber.

照明光学系统IL与多个照明区域IR1~IR6相应地设有多个(第1实施方式中为例如六个)照明模块IL1~IL6。来自光源装置的照明光束EL1分别入射到多个照明模块IL1~IL6中。各照明模块IL1~IL6将从光源装置入射的照明光束EL1分别向各照明区域IR1~IR6引导。也就是说,照明模块IL1将照明光束EL1向照明区域IR1引导,同样地,照明模块IL2~IL6将照明光束EL1向照明区域IR2~IR6引导。多个照明模块IL1~IL6隔着中心面CL沿光罩M的扫描方向配置成两列。照明模块IL1、IL3及IL5相对于中心面CL配置在照明区域IR1、IR3及IR5的配置侧(图5的左侧)。照明模块IL1、IL3及IL5沿Y方向隔开规定的间隔而配置。另外,照明模块IL2、IL4及IL6相对于中心面CL配置在照明区域IR2、IR4及IR6的配置侧(图5的右侧)。照明模块IL2、IL4及IL6沿Y方向隔开规定的间隔而配置。此时,照明模块IL2在Y方向上配置于照明模块IL1与照明模块IL3之间。同样地,照明模块IL3在Y方向上配置于照明模块IL2与照明模块IL4之间。照明模块IL4在Y方向上配置于照明模块IL3与照明模块IL5之间。照明模块IL5在Y方向上配置于照明模块IL4与照明模块IL6之间。另外,照明模块IL1、IL3及IL5与照明模块IL2、IL4及IL6在从Y方向观察时以中心面CL为中心对称地配置。The illumination optical system IL is provided with a plurality of (for example, six in the first embodiment) illumination modules IL1 to IL6 corresponding to the plurality of illumination regions IR1 to IR6. The illumination light beam EL1 from the light source device is incident on the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6, respectively. Each illumination module IL1 to IL6 guides the illumination light beam EL1 incident from the light source device to each illumination region IR1 to IR6, respectively. That is, the illumination module IL1 guides the illumination light beam EL1 to the illumination region IR1, and similarly, the illumination modules IL2 to IL6 guide the illumination light beam EL1 to the illumination region IR2 to IR6. The plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 are arranged in two rows along the scanning direction of the mask M across the center plane CL. The illumination modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 are arranged on the arrangement side of the illumination regions IR1, IR3, and IR5 relative to the center plane CL (the left side of FIG. 5 ). The illumination modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 are arranged at predetermined intervals along the Y direction. In addition, the lighting modules IL2, IL4 and IL6 are arranged on the arrangement side of the lighting regions IR2, IR4 and IR6 relative to the center plane CL (the right side of FIG. 5 ). The lighting modules IL2, IL4 and IL6 are arranged at predetermined intervals along the Y direction. At this time, the lighting module IL2 is arranged between the lighting module IL1 and the lighting module IL3 in the Y direction. Similarly, the lighting module IL3 is arranged between the lighting module IL2 and the lighting module IL4 in the Y direction. The lighting module IL4 is arranged between the lighting module IL3 and the lighting module IL5 in the Y direction. The lighting module IL5 is arranged between the lighting module IL4 and the lighting module IL6 in the Y direction. In addition, the lighting modules IL1, IL3 and IL5 and the lighting modules IL2, IL4 and IL6 are arranged symmetrically with the center plane CL as the center when viewed from the Y direction.

多个照明模块IL1~IL6分别包括例如积分器光学系统、杆透镜、复眼透镜等多个光学部件,通过照度分布均匀的照明光束EL1对各照明区域IR1~IR6进行照明。在第1实施方式中,多个照明模块IL1~IL6配置在光罩M的Z方向上的上方侧。多个照明模块IL1~IL6分别从光罩M的上方侧对形成于光罩M上的光罩图案的各照明区域IR进行照明。The plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 respectively include a plurality of optical components such as an integrator optical system, a rod lens, and a fly-eye lens, and illuminate the respective illumination regions IR1 to IR6 with an illumination light beam EL1 having a uniform illumination distribution. In the first embodiment, the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 are arranged on the upper side in the Z direction of the mask M. The plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 respectively illuminate the respective illumination regions IR of the mask pattern formed on the mask M from the upper side of the mask M.

接下来,说明通过投影光学系统PL被投影曝光的多个投影区域PA1~PA6。如图6所示,基板P上的多个投影区域PA1~PA6与光罩M上的多个照明区域IR1~IR6对应地配置。也就是说,基板P上的多个投影区域PA1~PA6隔着中心面CL沿搬送方向配置成两列,在搬送方向(扫描方向)的上游侧的基板P上配置有投影区域PA1、PA3及PA5,在搬送方向的下流侧的基板P上配置有投影区域PA2、PA4及PA6。各投影区域PA1~PA6为具有沿基板P的宽度方向(Y方向)延伸的短边及长边的细长的梯形形状的区域。此时,梯形形状的各投影区域PA1~PA6为其短边位于中心面CL侧、其长边位于外侧的区域。投影区域PA1、PA3及PA5沿宽度方向隔开规定的间隔而配置。另外,投影区域PA2、PA4及PA6沿宽度方向隔开规定的间隔而配置。此时,投影区域PA2在旋转轴AX2的轴向上配置于投影区域PA1与投影区域PA3之间。同样地,投影区域PA3在旋转轴AX2的轴向上配置于投影区域PA2与投影区域PA4之间。投影区域PA4在旋转轴AX2的轴向上配置于投影区域PA3与投影区域PA5之间。投影区域PA5在旋转轴AX2的轴向上配置于投影区域PA4与投影区域PA6之间。各投影区域PA1~PA6与各照明区域IR1~IR6同样地,在从基板P的搬送方向观察时,以相邻的梯形形状的投影区域PA的斜边部的三角部重叠(overlap)的方式配置。此时,投影区域PA为相邻的投影区域PA的重复区域中的曝光量与不重复区域中的曝光量实质相同这样的形状。而且,投影区域PA1~PA6以覆盖基板P上要曝光的曝光区域A7的Y方向上的整个宽度的方式配置。Next, the multiple projection areas PA1 to PA6 projected and exposed by the projection optical system PL are described. As shown in FIG. 6 , the multiple projection areas PA1 to PA6 on the substrate P are arranged corresponding to the multiple illumination areas IR1 to IR6 on the mask M. That is, the multiple projection areas PA1 to PA6 on the substrate P are arranged in two rows across the center plane CL along the conveying direction, and the projection areas PA1, PA3 and PA5 are arranged on the substrate P on the upstream side of the conveying direction (scanning direction), and the projection areas PA2, PA4 and PA6 are arranged on the substrate P on the downstream side of the conveying direction. Each projection area PA1 to PA6 is an elongated trapezoidal area having short sides and long sides extending along the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P. At this time, each projection area PA1 to PA6 of the trapezoidal shape is an area whose short side is located on the center plane CL side and whose long side is located on the outside. The projection areas PA1, PA3 and PA5 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction. In addition, the projection areas PA2, PA4 and PA6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction. At this time, projection area PA2 is arranged between projection area PA1 and projection area PA3 in the axial direction of rotation axis AX2. Similarly, projection area PA3 is arranged between projection area PA2 and projection area PA4 in the axial direction of rotation axis AX2. Projection area PA4 is arranged between projection area PA3 and projection area PA5 in the axial direction of rotation axis AX2. Projection area PA5 is arranged between projection area PA4 and projection area PA6 in the axial direction of rotation axis AX2. Each projection area PA1~PA6 is arranged in a manner that the triangular portions of the hypotenuse portions of adjacent trapezoidal projection areas PA overlap (overlap) when viewed from the conveying direction of substrate P, similarly to each illumination area IR1~IR6. At this time, projection area PA is a shape in which the exposure amount in the overlapping area of adjacent projection areas PA is substantially the same as the exposure amount in the non-overlapping area. Moreover, projection areas PA1~PA6 are arranged in a manner that covers the entire width of exposure area A7 to be exposed on substrate P in the Y direction.

在此,在图5中,在XZ面内观察时,从光罩M上的照明区域IR1(及IR3、IR5)的中心点到照明区域IR2(及IR4、IR6)的中心点为止的长度设定成与从仿照支承面P2的基板P上的投影区域PA1(及PA3、PA5)的中心点到投影区域PA2(及PA4、PA6)的中心点为止的周长实质相等。Here, in Figure 5, when observed in the XZ plane, the length from the center point of illumination area IR1 (and IR3, IR5) on the mask M to the center point of illumination area IR2 (and IR4, IR6) is set to be substantially equal to the circumference from the center point of projection area PA1 (and PA3, PA5) on the substrate P that imitates the support surface P2 to the center point of projection area PA2 (and PA4, PA6).

另外,如图5所示,投影光学系统PL与多个投影区域PA1~PA6相应地设有多个(第1实施方式中为例如六个)投影模块PL1~PL6。来自多个照明区域IR1~IR6的多个投影光束EL2分别入射到多个投影模块PL1~PL6。各投影模块PL1~PL6将来自光罩M的各投影光束EL2分别向各投影区域PA1~PA6引导。也就是说,投影模块PL1将来自照明区域IR1的投影光束EL2向投影区域PA1引导,同样地,投影模块PL2~PL6将来自照明区域IR2~IR6的各投影光束EL2向投影区域PA2~PA6引导。多个投影模块PL1~PL6隔着中心面CL沿光罩M的扫描方向配置成两列。投影模块PL1、PL3及PL5相对于中心面CL配置在投影区域PA1、PA3及PA5的配置侧(图5的左侧)。投影模块PL1、PL3及PL5沿Y方向隔开规定的间隔而配置。另外,投影模块PL2、PL4及PL6相对于中心面CL配置在投影区域PA2、PA4及PA6的配置侧(图5的右侧)。投影模块PL2、PL4及PL6沿Y方向隔开规定的间隔而配置。此时,投影模块PL2在旋转轴AX2的轴向上配置于投影模块PL1与投影模块PL3之间。同样地,投影模块PL3在旋转轴AX2的轴向上配置于投影模块PL2与投影模块PL4之间。投影模块PL4在旋转轴AX2的轴向上配置于投影模块PL3与投影模块PL5之间。投影模块PL5在旋转轴AX2的轴向上配置于投影模块PL4与投影模块PL6之间。另外,投影模块PL1、PL3及PL5与投影模块PL2、PL4及PL6在从Y方向观察时以中心面CL为中心对称地配置。In addition, as shown in FIG. 5 , the projection optical system PL is provided with a plurality of (for example, six in the first embodiment) projection modules PL1 to PL6 corresponding to the plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6. A plurality of projection light beams EL2 from a plurality of illumination areas IR1 to IR6 are incident on the plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6, respectively. Each projection module PL1 to PL6 guides each projection light beam EL2 from the mask M to each projection area PA1 to PA6, respectively. That is, the projection module PL1 guides the projection light beam EL2 from the illumination area IR1 to the projection area PA1, and similarly, the projection modules PL2 to PL6 guide each projection light beam EL2 from the illumination area IR2 to IR6 to the projection area PA2 to PA6. The plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6 are arranged in two rows along the scanning direction of the mask M across the center plane CL. The projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 are arranged on the arrangement side of the projection areas PA1, PA3, and PA5 relative to the center plane CL (the left side of FIG. 5 ). The projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 are arranged at a predetermined interval along the Y direction. In addition, projection modules PL2, PL4 and PL6 are arranged on the arrangement side of projection areas PA2, PA4 and PA6 relative to the center plane CL (the right side of FIG. 5 ). Projection modules PL2, PL4 and PL6 are arranged at a predetermined interval along the Y direction. At this time, projection module PL2 is arranged between projection module PL1 and projection module PL3 in the axial direction of rotation axis AX2. Similarly, projection module PL3 is arranged between projection module PL2 and projection module PL4 in the axial direction of rotation axis AX2. Projection module PL4 is arranged between projection module PL3 and projection module PL5 in the axial direction of rotation axis AX2. Projection module PL5 is arranged between projection module PL4 and projection module PL6 in the axial direction of rotation axis AX2. In addition, projection modules PL1, PL3 and PL5 are arranged symmetrically with projection modules PL2, PL4 and PL6 with center plane CL as the center when viewed from the Y direction.

多个投影模块PL1~PL6与多个照明模块IL1~IL6对应地设置。也就是说,投影模块PL1将由照明模块IL1照明的照明区域IR1的光罩图案的像向基板P上的投影区域PA1投影。同样地,投影模块PL2~PL6将由照明模块IL2~IL6照明的照明区域IR2~IR6的光罩图案的像向基板P上的投影区域PA2~PA6投影。A plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6 are provided corresponding to a plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6. That is, projection module PL1 projects the image of the mask pattern of illumination area IR1 illuminated by illumination module IL1 to projection area PA1 on substrate P. Similarly, projection modules PL2 to PL6 project the image of the mask pattern of illumination area IR2 to IR6 illuminated by illumination modules IL2 to IL6 to projection areas PA2 to PA6 on substrate P.

接下来,参照图7来说明各投影模块PL1~PL6。此外,各投影模块PL1~PL6为相同结构,因此以投影模块PL1为例进行说明。Next, each of the projection modules PL1 to PL6 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. In addition, each of the projection modules PL1 to PL6 has the same structure, so the description will be made taking the projection module PL1 as an example.

投影模块PL1将光罩M上的照明区域IR(照明区域IR1)中的光罩图案的像投影于基板P上的投影区域PA。如图7所示,投影模块PL1具有:将照明区域IR中的光罩图案的像成像于中间像面P7的第1光学系统61;将由第1光学系统61成像的中间像的至少一部分再次成像于基板P的投影区域PA的第2光学系统62;和配置在供中间像形成的中间像面P7上的投影视野光阑63。另外,投影模块PL1具有焦点修正光学部件64、像移位用光学部件65、倍率修正用光学部件66和旋度修正机构67。The projection module PL1 projects the image of the mask pattern in the illumination area IR (illumination area IR1) on the mask M onto the projection area PA on the substrate P. As shown in FIG7 , the projection module PL1 includes: a first optical system 61 for imaging the image of the mask pattern in the illumination area IR onto the intermediate image plane P7; a second optical system 62 for imaging at least a portion of the intermediate image formed by the first optical system 61 onto the projection area PA of the substrate P again; and a projection field stop 63 disposed on the intermediate image plane P7 for forming the intermediate image. In addition, the projection module PL1 includes a focus correction optical component 64, an image shift optical component 65, a magnification correction optical component 66, and a rotation correction mechanism 67.

第1光学系统61及第2光学系统62是例如将戴森(Dyson)系统变形得到的远心的反射折射光学系统。第1光学系统61的光轴(以下,称为第2光轴BX2)相对于中心面CL实质上正交。第1光学系统61具有第1偏转部件70、第1透镜组71和第1凹面镜72。第1偏转部件70是具有第1反射面P3和第2反射面P4的三角棱镜。第1反射面P3是使来自光罩M的投影光束EL2反射、并使反射的投影光束EL2从第1透镜组71通过而向第1凹面镜72入射的面。第2反射面P4是供由第1凹面镜72反射的投影光束EL2从第1透镜组71通过而入射、并将入射的投影光束EL2朝向投影视野光阑63反射的面。第1透镜组71包括各种透镜,各种透镜的光轴配置在第2光轴BX2上。第1凹面镜72配置在将由复眼透镜生成的多个点光源通过从复眼透镜经由照明视野光阑直至第1凹面镜72的各种透镜而成像的光瞳面上。The first optical system 61 and the second optical system 62 are telecentric reflective-refractive optical systems obtained by deforming a Dyson system, for example. The optical axis of the first optical system 61 (hereinafter referred to as the second optical axis BX2) is substantially orthogonal to the center plane CL. The first optical system 61 includes a first deflection component 70, a first lens group 71, and a first concave mirror 72. The first deflection component 70 is a triangular prism having a first reflection surface P3 and a second reflection surface P4. The first reflection surface P3 is a surface that reflects the projection light beam EL2 from the mask M and allows the reflected projection light beam EL2 to pass through the first lens group 71 and enter the first concave mirror 72. The second reflection surface P4 is a surface that allows the projection light beam EL2 reflected by the first concave mirror 72 to pass through the first lens group 71 and enter, and reflects the incident projection light beam EL2 toward the projection field aperture 63. The first lens group 71 includes various lenses, and the optical axes of the various lenses are arranged on the second optical axis BX2. The first concave mirror 72 is disposed on a pupil plane where a plurality of point light sources generated by the fly-eye lens are imaged through various lenses from the fly-eye lens to the first concave mirror 72 via an illumination field stop.

来自光罩M的投影光束EL2从焦点修正光学部件64及像移位用光学部件65通过,并在第1偏转部件70的第1反射面P3反射,从第1透镜组71的上半部分的视野区域通过而向第1凹面镜72入射。入射到第1凹面镜72的投影光束EL2在第1凹面镜72反射,从第1透镜组71的下半部分的视野区域通过而向第1偏转部件70的第2反射面P4入射。入射到第2反射面P4的投影光束EL2在第2反射面P4反射,并向投影视野光阑63入射。The projection light beam EL2 from the mask M passes through the focus correction optical component 64 and the image shift optical component 65, is reflected by the first reflection surface P3 of the first deflection component 70, passes through the field of view area of the upper half of the first lens group 71, and is incident on the first concave mirror 72. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the first concave mirror 72 is reflected by the first concave mirror 72, passes through the field of view area of the lower half of the first lens group 71, and is incident on the second reflection surface P4 of the first deflection component 70. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the second reflection surface P4 is reflected by the second reflection surface P4, and is incident on the projection field aperture 63.

投影视野光阑63具有规定投影区域PA的形状的开口。即,投影视野光阑63的开口的形状规定投影区域PA的形状。The projection field aperture 63 has an opening that defines the shape of the projection area PA. That is, the shape of the opening of the projection field aperture 63 defines the shape of the projection area PA.

第2光学系统62是与第1光学系统61相同的结构,隔着中间像面P7与第1光学系统61对称地设置。第2光学系统62的光轴(以下,称为第3光轴BX3)相对于中心面CL实质上正交,与第2光轴BX2平行。第2光学系统62具有第2偏转部件80、第2透镜组81和第2凹面镜82。第2偏转部件80具有第3反射面P5和第4反射面P6。第3反射面P5是使来自投影视野光阑63的投影光束EL2反射、并使反射的投影光束EL2从第2透镜组81通过而向第2凹面镜82入射的面。第4反射面P6是供由第2凹面镜82反射的投影光束EL2从第2透镜组81通过而入射、并使入射的投影光束EL2朝向投影区域PA反射的面。第2透镜组81包括各种透镜,各种透镜的光轴配置在第3光轴BX3上。第2凹面镜82配置在将在第1凹面镜72中成像的多个点光源像通过从第1凹面镜72经由投影视野光阑63直至第2凹面镜82的各种透镜而成像的光瞳面上。The second optical system 62 has the same structure as the first optical system 61, and is symmetrically arranged with respect to the first optical system 61 via the intermediate image plane P7. The optical axis of the second optical system 62 (hereinafter referred to as the third optical axis BX3) is substantially orthogonal to the center plane CL and is parallel to the second optical axis BX2. The second optical system 62 includes a second deflection member 80, a second lens group 81, and a second concave mirror 82. The second deflection member 80 includes a third reflection surface P5 and a fourth reflection surface P6. The third reflection surface P5 is a surface that reflects the projection light beam EL2 from the projection field aperture 63, and causes the reflected projection light beam EL2 to pass through the second lens group 81 and enter the second concave mirror 82. The fourth reflection surface P6 is a surface that allows the projection light beam EL2 reflected by the second concave mirror 82 to pass through the second lens group 81 and enter, and causes the incident projection light beam EL2 to reflect toward the projection area PA. The second lens group 81 includes various lenses, and the optical axes of the various lenses are arranged on the third optical axis BX3. The second concave mirror 82 is arranged on the pupil plane where the multiple point light source images formed in the first concave mirror 72 are formed through the various lenses from the first concave mirror 72 to the second concave mirror 82 via the projection field aperture 63.

来自投影视野光阑63的投影光束EL2在第2偏转部件80的第3反射面P5反射,从第2透镜组81的上半部分的视野区域通过而向第2凹面镜82入射。入射到第2凹面镜82的投影光束EL2在第2凹面镜82反射,从第2透镜组81的下半部分的视野区域通过而向第2偏转部件80的第4反射面P6入射。入射到第4反射面P6的投影光束EL2在第4反射面P6反射,从倍率修正用光学部件66通过而向投影区域PA投射。由此,照明区域IR中的光罩图案的像以等倍(×1)投影于投影区域PA。The projection light beam EL2 from the projection field aperture 63 is reflected by the third reflection surface P5 of the second deflection member 80, passes through the field of view area of the upper half of the second lens group 81, and is incident on the second concave mirror 82. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the second concave mirror 82 is reflected by the second concave mirror 82, passes through the field of view area of the lower half of the second lens group 81, and is incident on the fourth reflection surface P6 of the second deflection member 80. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the fourth reflection surface P6 is reflected by the fourth reflection surface P6, passes through the magnification correction optical member 66, and is projected onto the projection area PA. As a result, the image of the mask pattern in the illumination area IR is projected onto the projection area PA at the same magnification (×1).

焦点修正光学部件64配置在光罩M与第1光学系统61之间。焦点修正光学部件64调整投影于基板P上的光罩图案的像的聚焦状态。焦点修正光学部件64是例如使两块楔状的棱镜成为反向(在图7中关于X方向为反向)并以作为整体而成为透明的平行平板的方式重合而成的部件。通过使该一对棱镜不改变彼此相对的面间的间隔地沿斜面方向滑动,能够使作为平行平板的厚度可变。由此对第1光学系统61的实际有效光路长度进行微调整,对形成于中间像面P7及投影区域PA的光罩图案的像的对焦(punt)状态进行微调整。The focus correction optical component 64 is arranged between the mask M and the first optical system 61. The focus correction optical component 64 adjusts the focusing state of the image of the mask pattern projected onto the substrate P. The focus correction optical component 64 is a component formed by, for example, overlapping two wedge-shaped prisms in opposite directions (in FIG. 7 , opposite directions with respect to the X direction) to form a transparent parallel flat plate as a whole. By sliding the pair of prisms along the inclined direction without changing the interval between the opposing surfaces, the thickness of the parallel flat plate can be made variable. In this way, the actual effective optical path length of the first optical system 61 is finely adjusted, and the focusing (punt) state of the image of the mask pattern formed on the intermediate image plane P7 and the projection area PA is finely adjusted.

像移位用光学部件65配置在光罩M与第1光学系统61之间。像移位用光学部件65对投影于基板P上的光罩图案的像以使其能够在像面内移动的方式进行调整。像移位用光学部件65由能够在图6的XZ面内倾斜的透明的平行平板玻璃、和能够在图7的YZ面内倾斜的透明的平行平板玻璃构成。通过调整这两片平行平板玻璃的各倾斜量,能够使形成于中间像面P7及投影区域PA的光罩图案的像沿X方向和Y方向微小移位。The image shifting optical component 65 is disposed between the mask M and the first optical system 61. The image shifting optical component 65 adjusts the image of the mask pattern projected on the substrate P so that it can move within the image plane. The image shifting optical component 65 is composed of a transparent parallel plate glass that can be tilted within the XZ plane of FIG. 6 and a transparent parallel plate glass that can be tilted within the YZ plane of FIG. 7. By adjusting the tilt amounts of the two parallel plate glasses, the image of the mask pattern formed on the intermediate image plane P7 and the projection area PA can be slightly shifted in the X direction and the Y direction.

倍率修正用光学部件66配置在第2偏转部件80与基板P之间。倍率修正用光学部件66构成为将例如凹透镜、凸透镜、凹透镜这三个透镜以规定间隔同轴地配置,将前后的凹透镜固定,使中间的凸透镜沿光轴(主光线)方向移动。由此,形成于投影区域PA的光罩图案的像能够维持远心的成像状态,同时各向同性地仅以微小量放大或缩小。此外,构成倍率修正用光学部件66的三片透镜组的光轴以与投影光束EL2的主光线平行的方式在XZ面内倾斜。The optical component 66 for magnification correction is arranged between the second deflection component 80 and the substrate P. The optical component 66 for magnification correction is configured by coaxially arranging three lenses, such as a concave lens, a convex lens, and a concave lens, at a predetermined interval, fixing the front and rear concave lenses, and moving the middle convex lens along the optical axis (main light) direction. As a result, the image of the mask pattern formed in the projection area PA can maintain a telecentric imaging state while isotropically enlarging or reducing only a small amount. In addition, the optical axis of the three lens groups constituting the optical component 66 for magnification correction is tilted in the XZ plane in a manner parallel to the main light of the projection light beam EL2.

旋度修正机构67通过例如致动器(图示略)而使第1偏转部件70绕与第2光轴BX2垂直的轴而微小旋转。该旋度修正机构67通过使第1偏转部件70旋转,而能够使形成于中间像面P7的光罩图案的像在该面P7内微小旋转。The rotation correction mechanism 67 slightly rotates the first deflection member 70 about an axis perpendicular to the second optical axis BX2 by, for example, an actuator (not shown). The rotation correction mechanism 67 can slightly rotate the image of the mask pattern formed on the intermediate image plane P7 within the plane P7 by rotating the first deflection member 70.

在这样构成的投影模块PL1~PL6中,来自光罩M的投影光束EL2从照明区域IR沿光罩面P1的法线方向射出,并向第1光学系统61入射。入射到第1光学系统61的投影光束EL2从焦点修正光学部件64及像移位用光学部件65透射,在第1光学系统61的第1偏转部件70的第1反射面(平面镜)P3上反射,从第1透镜组71通过而在第1凹面镜72上反射。由第1凹面镜72反射的投影光束EL2再次从第1透镜组71通过并在第1偏转部件70的第2反射面(平面镜)P4上反射,并向投影视野光阑63入射。从投影视野光阑63通过的投影光束EL2在第2光学系统62的第2偏转部件80的第3反射面(平面镜)P5上反射,从第2透镜组81通过而在第2凹面镜82上反射。由第2凹面镜82反射的投影光束EL2再次从第2透镜组81通过而在第2偏转部件80的第4反射面(平面镜)P6上反射,并向倍率修正用光学部件66入射。从倍率修正用光学部件66射出的投影光束EL2向基板P上的投影区域PA入射,将显现于照明区域IR内的光罩图案的像以等倍(×1)投影于投影区域PA。In the projection modules PL1 to PL6 thus configured, the projection light beam EL2 from the mask M is emitted from the illumination region IR in the normal direction of the mask surface P1, and enters the first optical system 61. The projection light beam EL2 entering the first optical system 61 is transmitted through the focus correction optical component 64 and the image shift optical component 65, is reflected on the first reflection surface (plane mirror) P3 of the first deflection component 70 of the first optical system 61, passes through the first lens group 71, and is reflected on the first concave mirror 72. The projection light beam EL2 reflected by the first concave mirror 72 passes through the first lens group 71 again, is reflected on the second reflection surface (plane mirror) P4 of the first deflection component 70, and enters the projection field aperture 63. The projection light beam EL2 passing through the projection field aperture 63 is reflected on the third reflection surface (plane mirror) P5 of the second deflection component 80 of the second optical system 62, passes through the second lens group 81, and is reflected on the second concave mirror 82. The projection light beam EL2 reflected by the second concave mirror 82 passes through the second lens group 81 again, is reflected on the fourth reflection surface (plane mirror) P6 of the second deflection member 80, and is incident on the magnification correction optical member 66. The projection light beam EL2 emitted from the magnification correction optical member 66 is incident on the projection area PA on the substrate P, and the image of the mask pattern displayed in the illumination area IR is projected on the projection area PA at the same magnification (×1).

<驱动单元的控制><Drive unit control>

接下来,参照图3来说明驱动单元122的控制。驱动单元122包含安装在设置于设置面E上的支柱框架146的光罩侧驱动部22和基板侧驱动部26而构成。Next, control of the drive unit 122 will be described with reference to Fig. 3. The drive unit 122 includes a mask-side drive unit 22 and a substrate-side drive unit 26 attached to a support frame 146 provided on the installation surface E.

如在先说明那样,光罩侧驱动部22由线性马达的磁铁轨道(定子)和线性马达的线圈单元(动子)构成,该磁铁轨道在支柱框架146上以沿X方向延伸设置的方式固定,该线性马达的线圈单元固定在与光罩载台21结合的传递部件23上且与该磁铁轨道以固定间隙相对。另外,基板侧驱动部2如先前的图4所示,包括:旋转马达,其由在支柱框架146侧作为定子而固定的线圈单元Cur、和在旋转滚筒25的旋转轴AX2侧的转子RT上作为动子而固定的磁铁单元MUr构成;和音圈马达(MUs、CUs),其从支柱框架146侧向旋转滚筒25赋予旋转轴AX2的方向(Y方向)上的推力。像这样,光罩侧驱动部22及基板侧驱动部26是能够以非接触的方式对传递部件23及旋转轴AX2直接传递动力的结构(直接驱动(direct drive)方式),但不限于上述结构。例如,也可以是,基板侧驱动部26具有电动马达和磁性齿轮,将电动马达固定于支柱框架146侧,在电动马达的输出轴与旋转轴AX2之间夹设磁性齿轮。As described above, the mask side drive unit 22 is composed of a magnet track (stator) of a linear motor and a coil unit (mover) of a linear motor, the magnet track being fixed on the support frame 146 in a manner extending in the X direction, and the coil unit of the linear motor being fixed on the transmission member 23 coupled to the mask carrier 21 and facing the magnet track with a fixed gap. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4 above, the substrate side drive unit 2 includes: a rotary motor composed of a coil unit Cur fixed as a stator on the support frame 146 side and a magnet unit MUr fixed as a mover on the rotor RT on the rotation axis AX2 side of the rotating drum 25; and a voice coil motor (MUs, CUs) that applies a thrust in the direction of the rotation axis AX2 (Y direction) to the rotating drum 25 from the support frame 146 side. As such, the mask side drive unit 22 and the substrate side drive unit 26 are structures capable of directly transmitting power to the transmission member 23 and the rotation axis AX2 in a non-contact manner (direct drive method), but are not limited to the above structure. For example, the substrate-side drive unit 26 may include an electric motor and a magnetic gear, the electric motor may be fixed to the support frame 146 side, and the magnetic gear may be interposed between the output shaft of the electric motor and the rotation axis AX2.

在以上那样的驱动单元122的结构中,图5所示的下级控制装置16使光罩载台21和旋转滚筒25同步地移动。因此,形成于光罩M的光罩面P1上的光罩图案的像在卷绕于旋转滚筒25的支承面P2(图4中的25a)上的基板P的表面(仿照圆周面的弯曲的面)上连续地重复进行投影曝光。在第1实施方式的曝光装置U3中,在光罩M向+X方向的同步移动中进行扫描曝光后,需要进行使光罩M返回到-X方向的初始位置的动作(卷回)。因此,在使旋转滚筒25以固定速度连续旋转而以等速持续输送基板P的情况下,在光罩M的卷回动作期间,在基板P上不进行图案曝光,在基板P的搬送方向上面板用图案跳跃(分隔)地形成。但是,由于实用上将扫描曝光时的基板P的速度(在此为周速)和光罩M的速度想定为50mm/s~100mm/s,所以若在光罩M卷回时以例如500mm/s的最高速来驱动光罩载台21,则能够将形成在基板P上的面板用图案间的在搬送方向上的余白缩窄。In the structure of the driving unit 122 as described above, the lower-level control device 16 shown in FIG5 moves the mask carrier 21 and the rotating drum 25 synchronously. Therefore, the image of the mask pattern formed on the mask surface P1 of the mask M is continuously and repeatedly projected and exposed on the surface (curved surface imitating a circular surface) of the substrate P wound on the supporting surface P2 (25a in FIG4) of the rotating drum 25. In the exposure device U3 of the first embodiment, after scanning exposure is performed in the synchronous movement of the mask M in the +X direction, it is necessary to perform an action (winding) to return the mask M to the initial position in the -X direction. Therefore, when the rotating drum 25 is continuously rotated at a fixed speed and the substrate P is continuously conveyed at a constant speed, during the winding action of the mask M, no pattern exposure is performed on the substrate P, and the panel pattern is formed in a jumping (separated) manner in the conveying direction of the substrate P. However, since in practice the speed of the substrate P during scanning exposure (here is the circumferential speed) and the speed of the mask M are assumed to be 50 mm/s to 100 mm/s, if the mask carrier 21 is driven at a maximum speed of, for example, 500 mm/s when the mask M is rolled back, the blank space between the panel patterns formed on the substrate P in the conveying direction can be narrowed.

在本实施方式中,通过激光干涉仪或线性编码器来精密地计测光罩载台21的X方向上的移动位置和速度,并通过图4中的标尺板25c的读取头EH精密地计测旋转滚筒25的外周面上的移动位置和速度,由此,能够准确地确保光罩M与基板P在扫描曝光方向上的位置同步和速度同步。In this embodiment, the moving position and speed of the mask carrier 21 in the X direction are accurately measured by a laser interferometer or a linear encoder, and the moving position and speed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum 25 are accurately measured by the reading head EH of the scale plate 25c in Figure 4, thereby accurately ensuring the position synchronization and speed synchronization of the mask M and the substrate P in the scanning exposure direction.

<推压机构><Pushing mechanism>

接下来,参照图2来说明推压机构130。推压机构130设在位置调整单元120与曝光单元121之间。推压机构130以对从位置调整单元120向曝光单元121供给的基板P赋予张力的方式进行推压。推压机构130具有推压部件151和使推压部件151升降的升降机构152。推压部件151相对于基板P以接触或非接触的状态推压基板P。作为推压部件151,例如,使用具有用于实现与基板P非接触状态的空气喷出口及吸入口的空气翻转杆、或与基板P接触的摩擦辊等。升降机构152使推压部件151在从基板P的一个面(背面)向另一个面(表面)推压的方向、即Z方向上升降。升降机构152与上级控制装置5连接,基于第2基板检测部124的检测结果被上级控制装置5控制。Next, the pushing mechanism 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 . The pushing mechanism 130 is provided between the position adjustment unit 120 and the exposure unit 121. The pushing mechanism 130 pushes in a manner that applies tension to the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121. The pushing mechanism 130 includes a pushing member 151 and a lifting mechanism 152 that lifts and lowers the pushing member 151. The pushing member 151 pushes the substrate P in a contact or non-contact state relative to the substrate P. As the pushing member 151, for example, an air flip bar having an air outlet and an air inlet for achieving a non-contact state with the substrate P, or a friction roller that contacts the substrate P, etc. is used. The lifting mechanism 152 lifts and lowers the pushing member 151 in the direction of pushing from one surface (back side) to the other surface (front side) of the substrate P, that is, in the Z direction. The lifting mechanism 152 is connected to the upper control device 5 and is controlled by the upper control device 5 based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit 124.

上级控制装置5基于第2基板检测部124的检测结果来控制推压机构130。具体地说,上级控制装置5根据由第2基板检测部124检测出的基板P的位置,计算出基板P的每单位时间(例如几毫秒)的位置位移量。上级控制装置5根据计算出的位移量,来调整推压部件151的Z方向上的移动量。也就是说,计算出的位移量越大,则视为基板P的振动越大,上级控制装置5控制升降机构152使推压部件151沿Z方向上升。上级控制装置5通过使推压部件151沿Z方向上升,对基板P赋予张力,使基板P的振动由推压部件151减振。The upper control device 5 controls the pushing mechanism 130 based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit 124. Specifically, the upper control device 5 calculates the position displacement of the substrate P per unit time (for example, several milliseconds) according to the position of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 124. The upper control device 5 adjusts the movement amount of the pushing component 151 in the Z direction according to the calculated displacement. In other words, the larger the calculated displacement, the larger the vibration of the substrate P is considered to be, and the upper control device 5 controls the lifting mechanism 152 to make the pushing component 151 rise in the Z direction. The upper control device 5 applies tension to the substrate P by making the pushing component 151 rise in the Z direction, so that the vibration of the substrate P is damped by the pushing component 151.

<基板回收装置><Substrate recovery device>

接下来,再次参照图2来说明基板回收装置4。基板回收装置4具有位置调整单元160、安装回收用卷FR2的第2轴承部161、和使第2轴承部161升降的第2升降机构162。另外,基板回收装置4具有排出角度检测部164和第3基板检测部165,排出角度检测部164及第3基板检测部165与上级控制装置5连接。在此,在第1实施方式中,与基板供给装置2同样地,上级控制装置5作为基板回收装置4的控制装置(控制部)发挥功能。此外,也可以构成为,作为基板回收装置4的控制装置,设置控制基板回收装置4的下级控制装置,由下级控制装置来控制基板回收装置4。Next, the substrate recovery device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 again. The substrate recovery device 4 has a position adjustment unit 160, a second bearing portion 161 on which the recovery roll FR2 is mounted, and a second lifting mechanism 162 for lifting and lowering the second bearing portion 161. In addition, the substrate recovery device 4 has a discharge angle detection portion 164 and a third substrate detection portion 165, and the discharge angle detection portion 164 and the third substrate detection portion 165 are connected to the upper control device 5. Here, in the first embodiment, similarly to the substrate supply device 2, the upper control device 5 functions as a control device (control portion) of the substrate recovery device 4. In addition, it can also be configured that, as the control device of the substrate recovery device 4, a lower control device for controlling the substrate recovery device 4 is provided, and the substrate recovery device 4 is controlled by the lower control device.

位置调整单元160包含图1所示的上述的边缘位置控制器EPC2而构成。此外,位置调整单元160与曝光装置U3的位置调整单元120的结构大致相同,具有基台170和边缘位置控制器EPC2。基台170设在设置面E上,并支承边缘位置控制器EPC2。基台170也可以是具有减振功能的减振台。The position adjustment unit 160 includes the above-mentioned edge position controller EPC2 shown in FIG1. In addition, the position adjustment unit 160 has a substantially similar structure to the position adjustment unit 120 of the exposure device U3, and includes a base 170 and an edge position controller EPC2. The base 170 is provided on the installation surface E and supports the edge position controller EPC2. The base 170 may also be a vibration reduction table having a vibration reduction function.

边缘位置控制器EPC2能够在基台170上沿基板P的宽度方向(Y方向)移动。边缘位置控制器EPC2具有包含设于基板P的搬送方向的最下流侧的搬送辊167在内的多个辊。搬送辊167将从位置调整单元160排出的基板P向回收用卷FR2引导。边缘位置控制器EPC2与上级控制装置5连接,并基于第3基板检测部165的检测结果被上级控制装置5控制。The edge position controller EPC2 can move on the base 170 in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P. The edge position controller EPC2 has a plurality of rollers including a conveying roller 167 provided at the most downstream side in the conveying direction of the substrate P. The conveying roller 167 guides the substrate P discharged from the position adjustment unit 160 to the recovery roll FR2. The edge position controller EPC2 is connected to the upper control device 5 and is controlled by the upper control device 5 based on the detection result of the third substrate detection unit 165.

第3基板检测部165对从边缘位置控制器EPC2回收到回收用卷FR2的基板P的宽度方向上的位置进行检测。第3基板检测部165固定在第2升降机构162上。因此,第3基板检测部165成为与回收用卷FR2相同的振动模式。第3基板检测部165对回收到回收用卷FR2的基板P的端部的边缘的位置进行检测。第3基板检测部165向所连接的上级控制装置5输出检测结果。The third substrate detection unit 165 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P recovered from the edge position controller EPC2 to the recovery roll FR2. The third substrate detection unit 165 is fixed to the second lifting mechanism 162. Therefore, the third substrate detection unit 165 becomes the same vibration mode as the recovery roll FR2. The third substrate detection unit 165 detects the position of the edge of the end of the substrate P recovered to the recovery roll FR2. The third substrate detection unit 165 outputs the detection result to the connected upper control device 5.

上级控制装置5基于第3基板检测部165的检测结果来控制边缘位置控制器EPC2。具体地说,上级控制装置5对由第3基板检测部165检测出的回收到回收用卷FR2的基板P的端部的边缘的位置、与预先规定的第3目标位置之间的差值进行计算。然后,上级控制装置5以使该差值成为零的方式对边缘位置控制器EPC2进行反馈控制,使基板P沿宽度方向移动,使基板P相对于回收用卷FR2在宽度方向上的位置成为第3目标位置。因此,边缘位置控制器EPC2能够将基板P相对于回收用卷FR2在宽度方向上的位置维持于第3目标位置。由此,由于能使基板P相对于回收用卷FR2在宽度方向上的位置固定,所以能够将回收用卷FR2的轴向上的端面对齐。此外,该情况下,作为反馈控制,可以是P控制、PI控制、PID控制等任意控制。The upper control device 5 controls the edge position controller EPC2 based on the detection result of the third substrate detection unit 165. Specifically, the upper control device 5 calculates the difference between the position of the edge of the end of the substrate P recovered to the recovery roll FR2 detected by the third substrate detection unit 165 and the predetermined third target position. Then, the upper control device 5 performs feedback control on the edge position controller EPC2 in such a way that the difference becomes zero, so that the substrate P moves in the width direction so that the position of the substrate P relative to the recovery roll FR2 in the width direction becomes the third target position. Therefore, the edge position controller EPC2 can maintain the position of the substrate P relative to the recovery roll FR2 in the width direction at the third target position. Thus, since the position of the substrate P relative to the recovery roll FR2 in the width direction can be fixed, the end face of the recovery roll FR2 in the axial direction can be aligned. In addition, in this case, the feedback control can be any control such as P control, PI control, PID control, etc.

第2轴承部161能够旋转地轴支承回收用卷FR2。轴支承于第2轴承部161上的回收用卷FR2当回收基板P时,与基板P的回收量相应地,回收用卷FR2的卷径逐渐变大。因此,在回收用卷FR2中基板P被回收的位置与基板P的回收量相应地变化。The second bearing 161 is rotatably supported by the recovery roll FR2. When the recovery roll FR2 supported by the second bearing 161 recovers the substrate P, the diameter of the recovery roll FR2 gradually increases in accordance with the amount of the recovered substrate P. Therefore, the position where the substrate P is recovered in the recovery roll FR2 changes in accordance with the amount of the recovered substrate P.

第2升降机构162设在设置面E与第2轴承部161之间。第2升降机构162使第2轴承部161与回收用卷FR2一起沿Z方向(铅垂方向)移动。第2升降机构162与上级控制装置5连接,上级控制装置5通过第2升降机构162使第2轴承部161沿Z方向移动,由此,能够通过回收用卷FR2使基板P被回收的位置成为规定的位置。The second lifting mechanism 162 is provided between the installation surface E and the second bearing portion 161. The second lifting mechanism 162 moves the second bearing portion 161 along the Z direction (vertical direction) together with the recovery roll FR2. The second lifting mechanism 162 is connected to the upper control device 5, and the upper control device 5 moves the second bearing portion 161 along the Z direction through the second lifting mechanism 162, thereby enabling the position where the substrate P is recovered to a predetermined position by the recovery roll FR2.

排出角度检测部164对从边缘位置控制器EPC2的搬送辊167排出的基板P的排出角度θ2进行检测。排出角度检测部164设在搬送辊167周围。在此,排出角度θ2是在XZ面内从搬送辊167的中心轴通过的沿铅垂方向延伸的直线与搬送辊167的下流侧的基板P所成的角度。排出角度检测部164向所连接的上级控制装置5输出检测结果。The discharge angle detection unit 164 detects the discharge angle θ2 of the substrate P discharged from the conveying roller 167 of the edge position controller EPC2. The discharge angle detection unit 164 is provided around the conveying roller 167. Here, the discharge angle θ2 is an angle formed by a straight line extending in the vertical direction passing through the central axis of the conveying roller 167 in the XZ plane and the substrate P on the downstream side of the conveying roller 167. The discharge angle detection unit 164 outputs the detection result to the connected upper control device 5.

上级控制装置5基于排出角度检测部164的检测结果来控制第2升降机构162。具体地说,上级控制装置5以使排出角度θ2成为预先规定的目标排出角度的方式来控制第2升降机构162。也就是说,当基板P向回收用卷FR2的回收量变多时,回收用卷FR2的卷径变大,由此相对于目标排出角度的排出角度θ2变小。因此,上级控制装置5通过使第2升降机构162向Z方向的上方侧移动(上升),使排出角度θ2变大,以使排出角度θ2成为目标排出角度的方式进行修正。像这样,上级控制装置5基于排出角度检测部164的检测结果,以使排出角度θ2成为目标排出角度的方式,对第2升降机构162进行反馈控制。因此,由于基板回收装置4能够始终以目标排出角度从搬送辊167排出基板P,所以能够减少因排出角度θ2的变化对基板P带来的影响。此外,该情况下,作为反馈控制,可以是P控制、PI控制、PID控制等任意控制。The upper control device 5 controls the second lifting mechanism 162 based on the detection result of the discharge angle detection unit 164. Specifically, the upper control device 5 controls the second lifting mechanism 162 in such a way that the discharge angle θ2 becomes a predetermined target discharge angle. That is, when the amount of substrate P recovered to the recovery roll FR2 increases, the roll diameter of the recovery roll FR2 increases, thereby the discharge angle θ2 relative to the target discharge angle becomes smaller. Therefore, the upper control device 5 makes the discharge angle θ2 larger by moving the second lifting mechanism 162 to the upper side of the Z direction (rising), so as to correct the discharge angle θ2 to the target discharge angle. In this way, the upper control device 5 performs feedback control on the second lifting mechanism 162 based on the detection result of the discharge angle detection unit 164 so that the discharge angle θ2 becomes the target discharge angle. Therefore, since the substrate recovery device 4 can always discharge the substrate P from the conveying roller 167 at the target discharge angle, the influence of the change of the discharge angle θ2 on the substrate P can be reduced. In this case, the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, or PID control.

<器件制造方法><Device manufacturing method>

接下来,参照图8来说明器件制造方法。图8是表示第1实施方式的器件制造方法的流程图。Next, a device manufacturing method will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 8 is a flowchart showing the device manufacturing method according to the first embodiment.

在图8所示的器件制造方法中,首先,例如对基于有机EL等自发光元件的显示面板进行功能/性能设计,通过CAD等设计必要的电路图案和布线图案(步骤S201)。接着,基于由CAD等设计的每一层的各种图案,制作必要的层量的光罩M(步骤S202)。另外,事先准备供给用卷FR1,该供给用卷FR1卷有成为显示面板的基材的挠性基板P(树脂膜、金属箔膜、塑料等)(步骤S203)。此外,该步骤S203中准备的卷状基板P可以是根据需要而对其表面进行了改性的基板、事先形成了基底层(例如基于刻印(imprint)方式的微小凹凸)的基板、预先积层有感光性的功能膜和/或透明膜(绝缘材料)的基板。In the device manufacturing method shown in FIG8 , first, for example, the function/performance design of a display panel based on a self-luminous element such as an organic EL is performed, and the necessary circuit patterns and wiring patterns are designed by CAD or the like (step S201). Next, based on the various patterns of each layer designed by CAD or the like, a mask M of the necessary number of layers is produced (step S202). In addition, a supply roll FR1 is prepared in advance, and the supply roll FR1 is rolled up with a flexible substrate P (resin film, metal foil film, plastic, etc.) that becomes the base material of the display panel (step S203). In addition, the roll substrate P prepared in step S203 may be a substrate whose surface has been modified as needed, a substrate on which a base layer (for example, microscopic bumps based on imprinting) has been formed in advance, or a substrate on which a photosensitive functional film and/or a transparent film (insulating material) has been pre-laminated.

接着,在基板P上形成由构成显示面板器件的电极、布线、绝缘膜、TFT(薄膜半导体)等构成的底面(back plane)层,并以在该底面上积层的方式形成基于有机EL等自发光元件的发光层(显示像素部)(步骤S204)。在该步骤S204中,也包含使用先前的各实施方式中说明的曝光装置U3对光致抗蚀层进行曝光的以往的光刻工序,但也可以包含基于以下工序的处理:取代光致抗蚀层而对涂敷了感光性硅烷耦合剂的基板P进行图案曝光而在表面上形成亲疏水性的图案的曝光工序;对光感应性的催化剂层进行图案曝光并通过非电解镀层法形成金属膜的图案(布线、电极等)的湿式工序;或者通过含有银纳米颗粒等导电材料的导电性墨水、含有绝缘材料的墨水、或含有半导体材料(并五苯:pentacene、半导体纳米管等)的墨水等描画图案的印刷工序等。Next, a back plane layer composed of electrodes, wiring, insulating film, TFT (thin film semiconductor), etc. constituting the display panel device is formed on the substrate P, and a light-emitting layer (display pixel portion) based on a self-luminous element such as an organic EL is formed by stacking on the back plane (step S204). In this step S204, the conventional photolithography process of exposing the photoresist layer using the exposure device U3 described in the previous embodiments is also included, but it can also include processing based on the following processes: an exposure process of forming a hydrophilic and hydrophobic pattern on the surface by patterning the substrate P coated with a photosensitive silane coupling agent instead of the photoresist layer; a wet process of patterning the photosensitive catalyst layer and forming a metal film pattern (wiring, electrode, etc.) by non-electrolytic plating; or a printing process of drawing a pattern by conductive ink containing conductive materials such as silver nanoparticles, ink containing insulating materials, or ink containing semiconductor materials (pentacene, semiconductor nanotubes, etc.).

接着,按每个以卷方式在长尺寸的基板P上连续地制造的显示面板器件,对基板P进行切割,在各显示面板器件的表面上粘贴保护膜(耐环境阻挡层)和彩色滤光片膜等,来组装器件(步骤S205)。接着,进行显示面板器件是否正常发挥功能或是否满足所期望的性能和特性的检查工序(步骤S206)。通过以上,能够制造显示面板(柔性显示器)。Next, the substrate P is cut for each display panel device that is continuously manufactured on the long substrate P in a roll manner, and a protective film (environmentally resistant barrier layer) and a color filter film are attached to the surface of each display panel device to assemble the device (step S205). Next, an inspection process is performed to determine whether the display panel device functions normally or satisfies the desired performance and characteristics (step S206). Through the above, a display panel (flexible display) can be manufactured.

以上,第1实施方式中,能够在设置面E上经由减振台131设置曝光单元121,并且将曝光单元121与位置调整单元120及驱动单元122分别以独立状态设置。也就是说,第1实施方式中,通过减振台131将曝光单元121与位置调整单元120及驱动单元122之间隔绝,即使它们成为不同的振动模式。因此,曝光单元121能够通过减振台131来减少来自位置调整单元120及驱动单元122的振动。As described above, in the first embodiment, the exposure unit 121 can be installed on the installation surface E via the vibration reduction table 131, and the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the drive unit 122 can be installed in an independent state. That is, in the first embodiment, the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the drive unit 122 are isolated from each other by the vibration reduction table 131, that is, they are in different vibration modes. Therefore, the exposure unit 121 can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 through the vibration reduction table 131.

另外,第1实施方式中,能够将基板P相对于固定辊126在宽度方向上的位置维持于第1目标位置。因此,由于基板P相对于固定辊126供给到相同位置,所以能够使从固定辊126供给的基板P的宽度方向上的位置固定。由此,第1实施方式中,由于能够使从固定辊126送出的基板P的宽度方向上的位置固定,所以能减少因基板P的宽度方向上的位置的变动对基板P带来的振动等影响。In addition, in the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P in the width direction relative to the fixed roller 126 can be maintained at the first target position. Therefore, since the substrate P is supplied to the same position relative to the fixed roller 126, the position in the width direction of the substrate P supplied from the fixed roller 126 can be fixed. Therefore, in the first embodiment, since the position in the width direction of the substrate P sent out from the fixed roller 126 can be fixed, the influence of vibration and the like on the substrate P due to the change in the position in the width direction of the substrate P can be reduced.

另外,第1实施方式中,能够将基板P相对于搬送辊127的位置维持于第2目标位置。因此,第1实施方式中,能够使供给到曝光单元121的基板P的位置固定。由此,第1实施方式中,由于能够使供给到搬送辊127的基板P的位置固定,所以能够减少因基板P的位置的变动对基板P带来的振动等影响。In addition, in the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P relative to the conveying roller 127 can be maintained at the second target position. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121 can be fixed. Therefore, in the first embodiment, since the position of the substrate P supplied to the conveying roller 127 can be fixed, the influence of vibration and the like on the substrate P due to the change in the position of the substrate P can be reduced.

另外,第1实施方式中,通过推压机构130来推压基板P,由此,能够进一步减少从位置调整单元120向曝光单元121供给的基板P的振动。Moreover, in the first embodiment, the substrate P is pressed by the pressing mechanism 130 , thereby making it possible to further reduce the vibration of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121 .

另外,第1实施方式中,能够将装置框架132分离为第1框架132a和第2框架132b,在第1框架132a上支承光罩载台21,并在第2框架132b上支承旋转滚筒25。因此,能够将第1框架132a和第2框架132b分别以独立状态设置。也就是说,能够将第1框架132a与第2框架132b隔绝、即使它们成为不同的振动模式。因此,能够减少第1框架132a及第2框架132b的相互的振动传递。In addition, in the first embodiment, the device frame 132 can be separated into the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b, and the mask carrier 21 is supported on the first frame 132a, and the rotating drum 25 is supported on the second frame 132b. Therefore, the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b can be set in an independent state. In other words, the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b can be isolated, that is, they can be in different vibration modes. Therefore, the mutual vibration transmission between the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b can be reduced.

另外,第1实施方式中,能够使从供给用卷FR1向曝光装置U3的位置调整单元120的搬送辊127供给的基板P的、相对于搬送辊127的进入角度θ1固定。因此,能够减少因进入角度θ1的位移对基板P的影响。In the first embodiment, the substrate P supplied from the supply roll FR1 to the conveying roller 127 of the position adjustment unit 120 of the exposure device U3 can have a fixed approach angle θ1 with respect to the conveying roller 127. Therefore, the influence of the displacement of the approach angle θ1 on the substrate P can be reduced.

另外,第1实施方式中,能够使从基板回收装置4的位置调整单元160的搬送辊167向回收用卷FR2供给的基板P的、相对于搬送辊167的排出角度θ2固定。因此,能够减少因排出角度θ2的位移对基板P的影响(基板P向回收用卷FR2的卷绕不均等)。In addition, in the first embodiment, the discharge angle θ2 of the substrate P supplied from the conveying roller 167 of the position adjustment unit 160 of the substrate recovery device 4 to the recovery roll FR2 relative to the conveying roller 167 can be fixed. Therefore, the influence of the displacement of the discharge angle θ2 on the substrate P (uneven winding of the substrate P to the recovery roll FR2) can be reduced.

[第2实施方式][Second embodiment]

接下来,参照图9来说明第2实施方式的曝光装置U3。此外,在第2实施方式中,为了避免重复的记载,仅对与第1实施方式不同的部分进行说明,对于与第1实施方式相同的结构要素,标注与第1实施方式相同的附图标记来进行说明。图9是表示第2实施方式的曝光装置(基板处理装置)U3的一部分结构的图。第1实施方式的曝光装置U3的曝光单元121中,装置框架132分离为第1框架132a和第2框架132b,但第2实施方式的曝光装置U3的曝光单元121a为单体的装置框架180。Next, the exposure device U3 of the second embodiment is described with reference to FIG. 9 . In addition, in the second embodiment, in order to avoid repeated descriptions, only the parts different from the first embodiment are described, and the same structural elements as those in the first embodiment are marked with the same figure marks as those in the first embodiment for description. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the exposure device (substrate processing device) U3 of the second embodiment. In the exposure unit 121 of the exposure device U3 of the first embodiment, the device frame 132 is separated into the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b, but the exposure unit 121a of the exposure device U3 of the second embodiment is a single device frame 180.

在第2实施方式的曝光单元121a中,装置框架180设在减振台131上,并支承保持透射型的圆筒光罩MA的光罩保持机构11、基板支承机构12、照明机构13及投影光学系统PL。装置框架180由设在减振台131上的下表面部181、立设在下表面部181上的一对轴承部182、支承在一对轴承部182上的中间部183、立设在中间部183上的腿部184、支承在腿部184上的上表面部185、和立设在上表面部185上的臂部186构成。In the exposure unit 121a of the second embodiment, the device frame 180 is provided on the vibration reduction table 131, and supports the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate supporting mechanism 12, the lighting mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL that hold the transmission type cylindrical mask MA. The device frame 180 is composed of a lower surface portion 181 provided on the vibration reduction table 131, a pair of bearing portions 182 erected on the lower surface portion 181, an intermediate portion 183 supported on the pair of bearing portions 182, a leg portion 184 erected on the intermediate portion 183, an upper surface portion 185 supported on the leg portion 184, and an arm portion 186 erected on the upper surface portion 185.

在一对轴承部182上分别设有对基板支承机构12的旋转滚筒25的旋转轴AX2进行轴支承的空气轴承141。各空气轴承141将旋转轴AX2以非接触的状态旋转自如地轴支承。在中间部183上经由保持部件143而设置有投影光学系统PL。在保持部件143与中间部183之间的三处,夹设有垫片部件145。保持部件143通过三处的垫片部件145而运动地支承在中间部183上。在上表面部185上设有用于支承光罩保持机构11(中空的圆筒体)、并且绕旋转中心线AX1对圆筒光罩MA进行旋转驱动的驱动辊(绞盘辊)94。照明机构13配置在光罩保持机构11的内部,以图6中的左图所示那样的排列从内侧对圆筒光罩MA上的照明区域IR(IR1~IR6)进行照明。Air bearings 141 are provided on a pair of bearing portions 182 for axially supporting the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating drum 25 of the substrate support mechanism 12. Each air bearing 141 axially supports the rotation axis AX2 in a non-contact state. A projection optical system PL is provided on the middle portion 183 via a holding member 143. Spacer members 145 are provided at three locations between the holding member 143 and the middle portion 183. The holding member 143 is supported on the middle portion 183 in a movably manner by the spacer members 145 at three locations. A driving roller (capstan roller) 94 is provided on the upper surface portion 185 for supporting the mask holding mechanism 11 (hollow cylindrical body) and for rotationally driving the cylindrical mask MA around the rotation center line AX1. The lighting mechanism 13 is arranged inside the mask holding mechanism 11, and illuminates the illumination area IR (IR1 to IR6) on the cylindrical mask MA from the inside in an arrangement as shown in the left figure in FIG. 6.

而且,在上表面部185上设有用于将驱动辊94的旋转轴能够旋转地进行轴支承的轴承187,对驱动辊94进行旋转驱动的光罩侧驱动部22与先前的图4所示的基板侧驱动部26同样地构成。虽然未图示,但在圆筒体状的光罩保持机构11的旋转中心线AX1方向的两端部,设有与先前的图4相同的编码器计测用的标尺(衍射光栅)或标尺板25c,并通过与其相对地配置的读取头EH来精密地计测圆筒光罩MA的周向位置。Moreover, a bearing 187 for rotatably supporting the rotating shaft of the driving roller 94 is provided on the upper surface portion 185, and the mask side driving portion 22 for rotationally driving the driving roller 94 is configured similarly to the substrate side driving portion 26 shown in the previous FIG4. Although not shown in the figure, a scale (diffraction grating) or scale plate 25c for encoder measurement similar to that shown in the previous FIG4 is provided at both ends of the rotation center line AX1 direction of the cylindrical mask holding mechanism 11, and the circumferential position of the cylindrical mask MA is precisely measured by the reading head EH arranged opposite thereto.

以上,在第2实施方式中,能够通过单体的装置框架180支承光罩保持机构11、基板支承机构12、照明机构13及投影光学系统PL。因此,第2实施方式中,由于能够使光罩保持机构11、基板支承机构12、照明机构13及投影光学系统PL的位置关系固定,所以能够不用大幅调整它们的位置关系地容易地进行设置。As described above, in the second embodiment, the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate supporting mechanism 12, the lighting mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL can be supported by the single device frame 180. Therefore, in the second embodiment, since the positional relationship between the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate supporting mechanism 12, the lighting mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL can be fixed, they can be easily installed without greatly adjusting their positional relationship.

接下来,参照图10进一步详细地说明图9所示的第2实施方式的曝光装置U3(曝光单元121a)。在图10的曝光单元121a中,光罩保持机构11具有以圆筒状保持透射型的光罩MA的光罩保持滚筒21a、支承光罩保持滚筒21a的引导辊93、绕中心线AX1驱动光罩保持滚筒21a的驱动辊94、和光罩侧驱动部22。Next, the exposure device U3 (exposure unit 121a) of the second embodiment shown in Figure 9 is described in further detail with reference to Figure 10. In the exposure unit 121a of Figure 10, the mask holding mechanism 11 has a mask holding roller 21a that holds the transmission type mask MA in a cylindrical shape, a guide roller 93 that supports the mask holding roller 21a, a drive roller 94 that drives the mask holding roller 21a around the center line AX1, and a mask side drive unit 22.

光罩保持滚筒21a形成光罩MA上的配置有照明区域IR的光罩面P1。在本实施方式中,光罩面P1包括使线段(母线)绕与该线段平行的轴(圆筒形状的中心轴)旋转而成的面(以下,称为圆筒面)。圆筒面是例如圆筒的外周面、圆柱的外周面等。光罩保持滚筒21a由例如玻璃或石英等构成,是具有固定壁厚的圆筒状,其外周面(圆筒面)形成光罩面P1。即,在本实施方式中,光罩MA上的照明区域IR弯曲成从第1轴AX1具有固定半径Rm的圆筒面状。光罩保持滚筒21a中的从光罩保持滚筒21a的径向观察时与光罩MA的光罩图案重叠的部分、例如光罩保持滚筒21a的Y方向的两端侧以外的中央部分相对于照明光束EL1具有透光性。The mask holding roller 21a forms a mask surface P1 on the mask MA where the illumination area IR is arranged. In the present embodiment, the mask surface P1 includes a surface (hereinafter referred to as a cylindrical surface) formed by rotating a line segment (generatrix) around an axis (central axis of the cylindrical shape) parallel to the line segment. The cylindrical surface is, for example, the outer peripheral surface of a cylinder, the outer peripheral surface of a column, etc. The mask holding roller 21a is made of, for example, glass or quartz, and is cylindrical with a fixed wall thickness, and its outer peripheral surface (cylindrical surface) forms the mask surface P1. That is, in the present embodiment, the illumination area IR on the mask MA is bent into a cylindrical surface having a fixed radius Rm from the first axis AX1. The portion of the mask holding roller 21a that overlaps with the mask pattern of the mask MA when viewed from the radial direction of the mask holding roller 21a, for example, the central portion other than the two end sides of the mask holding roller 21a in the Y direction, is light-transmissive with respect to the illumination light beam EL1.

光罩MA制成为例如在平坦性好的短条状的极薄玻璃板(例如厚度为100~500μm)的一个面上以铬等遮光层形成有图案的透射型的平面状片光罩,使其仿照光罩保持滚筒21a的外周面而弯曲,并在卷绕(粘贴)于该外周面的状态下使用。光罩MA具有没有形成图案的图案非形成区域A4,在图案非形成区域A4处安装于光罩保持滚筒21a。光罩MA能够相对于光罩保持滚筒21a释放。关于光罩MA,也可以取代在基于透明圆筒母材形成的光罩保持滚筒21a上卷绕,而在基于透明圆筒母材形成的光罩保持滚筒21a的外周面上直接描画形成基于铬等遮光层的光罩图案而一体化。该情况下,光罩保持滚筒21a也作为光罩MA的支承部件发挥功能。The photomask MA is made, for example, as a transmissive flat sheet photomask with a pattern formed by a light-shielding layer such as chrome on one surface of a short strip of extremely thin glass plate (for example, with a thickness of 100 to 500 μm) with good flatness, so that it is bent to imitate the outer peripheral surface of the photomask holding roller 21a, and is used in a state of being wound (pasted) on the outer peripheral surface. The photomask MA has a pattern non-forming area A4 where no pattern is formed, and is installed on the photomask holding roller 21a at the pattern non-forming area A4. The photomask MA can be released relative to the photomask holding roller 21a. Regarding the photomask MA, instead of being wound on the photomask holding roller 21a formed based on a transparent cylindrical base material, a mask pattern based on a light-shielding layer such as chrome can be directly drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the photomask holding roller 21a formed based on a transparent cylindrical base material to form an integrated one. In this case, the photomask holding roller 21a also functions as a supporting member of the photomask MA.

引导辊93及驱动辊94沿相对于光罩保持滚筒21a的中心轴平行的Y方向延伸。引导辊93及驱动辊94以能够绕与中心轴平行的轴旋转的方式设置。引导辊93及驱动辊94各自轴向的端部的外径比其他部分的外径大,该端部与光罩保持滚筒21a外接。像这样,引导辊93及驱动辊94以不与保持于光罩保持滚筒21a的光罩MA接触的方式设置。驱动辊94与光罩侧驱动部22连接。驱动辊94将来自光罩侧驱动部22的动力向光罩保持滚筒21a传递,由此使光罩保持滚筒21a绕中心轴AX1旋转。The guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 extend in the Y direction parallel to the central axis of the mask holding roller 21a. The guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 are arranged in a manner that they can rotate around an axis parallel to the central axis. The outer diameter of the axial end of each of the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 is larger than the outer diameter of other parts, and the end is circumscribed with the mask holding roller 21a. In this way, the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 are arranged in a manner that they do not contact the mask MA held on the mask holding roller 21a. The drive roller 94 is connected to the mask side drive unit 22. The drive roller 94 transmits the power from the mask side drive unit 22 to the mask holding roller 21a, thereby rotating the mask holding roller 21a around the central axis AX1.

此外,光罩保持机构11具有一个引导辊93,但数量没有限定,也可以是两个以上。同样地,光罩保持机构11具有一个驱动辊94,但数量没有限定,也可以是两个以上。引导辊93和驱动辊94中的至少一个可以配置在光罩保持滚筒21a的内侧,并与光罩保持滚筒21a内接。另外,光罩保持滚筒21a中的从光罩保持滚筒21a的径向观察时不与光罩MA的光罩图案重叠的部分(Y方向的两端侧)可以相对于照明光束EL1具有透光性,也可以不具有透光性。另外,引导辊93及驱动辊94中的一方或双方可以是例如圆台状,其中心轴(旋转轴)相对于中心轴AX1不平行。In addition, the mask holding mechanism 11 has a guide roller 93, but the number is not limited and may be more than two. Similarly, the mask holding mechanism 11 has a drive roller 94, but the number is not limited and may be more than two. At least one of the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 may be arranged on the inner side of the mask holding roller 21a and in contact with the mask holding roller 21a. In addition, the portion of the mask holding roller 21a that does not overlap with the mask pattern of the mask MA when viewed from the radial direction of the mask holding roller 21a (the two end sides in the Y direction) may be light-transmissive or non-light-transmissive with respect to the illumination light beam EL1. In addition, one or both of the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 may be, for example, truncated cone-shaped, and its central axis (rotation axis) is not parallel to the central axis AX1.

照明机构13与第1实施方式同样地构成,照明机构13的多个照明模块ILa1~ILa6配置在光罩保持滚筒21a的内侧。多个照明模块ILa1~ILa6分别引导从光源射出的照明光束EL1,并将引导的照明光束EL1从光罩保持滚筒21a的内部向光罩MA照射。照明机构13通过照明光束EL1以均匀的亮度对光罩保持机构11所保持的光罩MA的照明区域IR进行照明。此外,光源可以配置在光罩保持滚筒21a的内侧,也可以配置在光罩保持滚筒21a的外侧。另外,光源可以是与曝光装置U3独立的装置(外部装置)。The lighting mechanism 13 is constructed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and a plurality of lighting modules ILa1 to ILa6 of the lighting mechanism 13 are arranged on the inner side of the mask holding roller 21a. The plurality of lighting modules ILa1 to ILa6 respectively guide the lighting beam EL1 emitted from the light source, and irradiate the guided lighting beam EL1 to the mask MA from the inside of the mask holding roller 21a. The lighting mechanism 13 illuminates the lighting area IR of the mask MA held by the mask holding mechanism 11 with uniform brightness through the lighting beam EL1. In addition, the light source can be arranged on the inner side of the mask holding roller 21a, or on the outer side of the mask holding roller 21a. In addition, the light source can be a device (external device) independent of the exposure device U3.

像这样,第2实施方式中,即使曝光单元121a的光罩MA是圆筒状的透射型的光罩,也能够将曝光单元121a与位置调整单元120及驱动单元122分别以独立状态(振动的传递被隔绝的状态)设置。因此,曝光单元121a能够通过减振台131减少来自位置调整单元120及驱动单元122的振动,能够得到与上述第1实施方式相同的效果。As described above, in the second embodiment, even if the mask MA of the exposure unit 121a is a cylindrical transmission-type mask, the exposure unit 121a can be provided in an independent state (a state where the transmission of vibration is isolated) from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122. Therefore, the exposure unit 121a can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 through the vibration reduction table 131, and the same effect as the first embodiment can be obtained.

[第3实施方式][Third embodiment]

接下来,参照图11来说明第3实施方式的曝光装置U3。此外,在第3实施方式中,也为了避免重复的记载而仅对与第1实施方式和第2实施方式不同的部分进行说明,对于与第1实施方式和第2实施方式相同的结构要素,标注与第1或第2实施方式相同的附图标记来进行说明。图11示出第3实施方式的曝光单元121b的整体结构,是使用圆筒状的反射型的光罩MB并且将基板P以平面状支承的结构。Next, the exposure device U3 of the third embodiment is described with reference to FIG11. In addition, in the third embodiment, only the parts different from the first embodiment and the second embodiment are described to avoid duplication, and the same components as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment are described by marking the same reference numerals as those of the first or second embodiment. FIG11 shows the overall structure of the exposure unit 121b of the third embodiment, which is a structure that uses a cylindrical reflective mask MB and supports the substrate P in a planar shape.

首先,说明在第3实施方式的曝光装置U3中使用的光罩MB。光罩MB为例如使用金属制的圆筒体的反射型的光罩。光罩MB形成为具有以沿Y方向延伸的第1轴AX1为中心的曲率半径为Rm的外周面(圆周面)的圆筒体,径向上具有固定壁厚。光罩MB的圆周面为形成有规定的光罩图案的光罩面P1。光罩面P1具有在规定方向上以高效率反射光束的高反射部、和在规定方向上不反射光束或以低效率反射光束的反射抑制部,光罩图案由高反射部及反射抑制部形成。这样的光罩MB由于是金属制的圆筒体,所以能够廉价地制造。First, the photomask MB used in the exposure device U3 of the third embodiment is described. The photomask MB is a reflective photomask using, for example, a metal cylindrical body. The photomask MB is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer peripheral surface (circumferential surface) with a curvature radius Rm centered on the first axis AX1 extending along the Y direction, and has a fixed wall thickness in the radial direction. The circumferential surface of the photomask MB is a photomask surface P1 formed with a prescribed photomask pattern. The photomask surface P1 has a high-reflection portion that reflects a light beam with high efficiency in a prescribed direction, and a reflection suppression portion that does not reflect a light beam or reflects a light beam with low efficiency in a prescribed direction, and the photomask pattern is formed by the high-reflection portion and the reflection suppression portion. Such a photomask MB can be manufactured inexpensively because it is a metal cylindrical body.

此外,光罩MB只要具有以第1轴AX1为中心的曲率半径为Rm的圆周面即可,不限定于圆筒体的形状。例如,光罩MB也可以是具有圆周面的圆弧状的板材。另外,光罩MB可以是薄板状,也可以使薄板状的光罩MB弯曲而具有圆周面。In addition, the photomask MB only needs to have a circumferential surface with a curvature radius Rm centered on the first axis AX1, and is not limited to a cylindrical shape. For example, the photomask MB may also be an arc-shaped plate having a circumferential surface. In addition, the photomask MB may be in the form of a thin plate, or the thin plate-shaped photomask MB may be bent to have a circumferential surface.

光罩保持机构11具有保持光罩MB的光罩保持滚筒21b。光罩保持滚筒21b以使光罩M的第1轴AX1成为旋转中心的方式保持光罩MB。光罩侧驱动部22与下级控制装置16连接,以第1轴AX1为旋转中心使光罩保持滚筒21b旋转。The mask holding mechanism 11 includes a mask holding drum 21b that holds the mask MB. The mask holding drum 21b holds the mask MB with the first axis AX1 of the mask M as the rotation center. The mask-side driving unit 22 is connected to the lower control device 16 and rotates the mask holding drum 21b with the first axis AX1 as the rotation center.

此外,光罩保持机构11通过光罩保持滚筒21b来保持圆筒体的光罩M,但不限于该结构。光罩保持机构11也可以仿照光罩保持滚筒21b的外周面将薄板状的光罩MB卷绕来进行保持。另外,光罩保持机构11可以在光罩保持滚筒21b的外周面上保持作为圆弧状板材的光罩MB。In addition, the mask holding mechanism 11 holds the cylindrical mask M by the mask holding roller 21b, but is not limited to this structure. The mask holding mechanism 11 can also hold the thin plate-shaped mask MB by winding it along the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding roller 21b. In addition, the mask holding mechanism 11 can hold the mask MB as an arc-shaped plate on the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding roller 21b.

基板支承机构12具有搭挂基板P的一对驱动辊196、以平面状支承基板P的空气载台197、和多个引导辊28。一对驱动辊196通过基板侧驱动部26而旋转,使基板P沿扫描方向移动。空气载台197设在一对驱动辊196之间,且设在以固定张力搭挂于一对驱动辊196之间的基板P的背面侧,以非接触状态或低摩擦状态以平面状支承基板P。多个引导辊28隔着一对驱动辊196分别设在基板P的搬送方向的上游侧及下流侧。例如引导辊28共设有四个,两个设在搬送方向的上游侧,两个设在搬送方向的下流侧。The substrate support mechanism 12 has a pair of driving rollers 196 for hanging the substrate P, an air stage 197 for supporting the substrate P in a planar shape, and a plurality of guide rollers 28. The pair of driving rollers 196 are rotated by the substrate-side driving unit 26 to move the substrate P along the scanning direction. The air stage 197 is disposed between the pair of driving rollers 196 and on the back side of the substrate P hung between the pair of driving rollers 196 with a fixed tension, and supports the substrate P in a planar shape in a non-contact state or a low-friction state. The plurality of guide rollers 28 are respectively disposed on the upstream side and the downstream side of the conveying direction of the substrate P across the pair of driving rollers 196. For example, a total of four guide rollers 28 are provided, two of which are disposed on the upstream side of the conveying direction, and two of which are disposed on the downstream side of the conveying direction.

因此,基板支承机构12将从位置调整单元120搬送的基板P通过两个引导辊28向一方的驱动辊196引导。被引导到一方的驱动辊196的基板P被向另一方的驱动辊196引导,由此,以固定的张力搭挂在一对驱动辊196上。基板支承机构12通过基板侧驱动部26使一对驱动辊196旋转,由此将搭挂在一对驱动辊196上的基板P边由空气载台197支承边朝向引导辊28搬送。基板支承机构12将搬送到引导辊28的基板P朝向基板回收装置4引导。Therefore, the substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P conveyed from the position adjustment unit 120 to the driving roller 196 on one side through the two guide rollers 28. The substrate P guided to the driving roller 196 on one side is guided to the driving roller 196 on the other side, thereby being hung on the pair of driving rollers 196 with a fixed tension. The substrate support mechanism 12 rotates the pair of driving rollers 196 through the substrate side driving unit 26, thereby conveying the substrate P hung on the pair of driving rollers 196 toward the guide roller 28 while being supported by the air stage 197. The substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P conveyed to the guide roller 28 toward the substrate recovery device 4.

在使用圆筒状的反射型的光罩MB的情况下,照明机构13从光罩保持滚筒21b的外周侧照射照明光束EL1。也就是说,照明机构13的光源装置及照明光学系统IL设在光罩保持滚筒21b的外周。照明光学系统IL为使用偏光分束器PBS的落射照明系统。在照明光学系统IL的各照明模块IL1~IL6与光罩MB之间设有偏光分束器PBS和1/4波长板198。也就是说,从来自光源装置的照明光束EL1的入射侧开始按顺序设有照明模块IL1~IL6、偏光分束器PBS、1/4波长板198。When a cylindrical reflective mask MB is used, the lighting mechanism 13 irradiates the illumination light beam EL1 from the outer peripheral side of the mask holding roller 21b. That is, the light source device and the illumination optical system IL of the lighting mechanism 13 are arranged on the outer periphery of the mask holding roller 21b. The illumination optical system IL is an incident illumination system using a polarizing beam splitter PBS. A polarizing beam splitter PBS and a 1/4 wavelength plate 198 are provided between each illumination module IL1 to IL6 of the illumination optical system IL and the mask MB. That is, the illumination modules IL1 to IL6, the polarizing beam splitter PBS, and the 1/4 wavelength plate 198 are provided in order from the incident side of the illumination light beam EL1 from the light source device.

在此,从光源装置射出的照明光束EL1从照明模块IL1~IL6通过而向偏光分束器PBS入射。入射到偏光分束器PBS的照明光束EL1在由偏光分束器PBS反射后,从1/4波长板198通过而向照明区域IR照明。从照明区域IR反射的投影光束EL2再次从1/4波长板198通过,由此转换成在偏光分束器PBS中透射的光束。从1/4波长板198通过的投影光束EL2通过偏光分束器PBS向投影光学系统PL入射。Here, the illumination light beam EL1 emitted from the light source device passes through the illumination modules IL1 to IL6 and enters the polarizing beam splitter PBS. The illumination light beam EL1 incident on the polarizing beam splitter PBS passes through the 1/4 wavelength plate 198 after being reflected by the polarizing beam splitter PBS and illuminates the illumination area IR. The projection light beam EL2 reflected from the illumination area IR passes through the 1/4 wavelength plate 198 again, thereby being converted into a light beam transmitted through the polarizing beam splitter PBS. The projection light beam EL2 passing through the 1/4 wavelength plate 198 enters the projection optical system PL through the polarizing beam splitter PBS.

以上,第3实施方式中,即使在曝光单元121b的光罩MB是圆筒状的反射型的光罩、且基板P以平面状被支承的情况下,也能够将曝光单元121b与位置调整单元120及驱动单元122分别以独立状态(振动的传递被隔绝的状态)设置。因此,曝光单元121b能够通过排减振台131来减少来自位置调整单元120及驱动单元122的振动,能够得到与上述第2实施方式相同的效果。As described above, in the third embodiment, even when the mask MB of the exposure unit 121b is a cylindrical reflective mask and the substrate P is supported in a planar shape, the exposure unit 121b can be provided in an independent state (a state where the transmission of vibration is isolated) from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122. Therefore, the exposure unit 121b can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 by the vibration reduction table 131, and the same effect as the second embodiment can be obtained.

[第4实施方式][Fourth embodiment]

接下来,说明第4实施方式的曝光装置(图案形成装置)U3。此外,在第4实施方式中,也为了避免重复的记载而仅对与第1~第3实施方式不同的部分进行说明,对于与第1~第3实施方式相同的结构要素,标注与第1~第3实施方式相同的附图标记并省略其说明。Next, the exposure device (pattern forming device) U3 of the fourth embodiment is described. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, only the parts different from the first to third embodiments are described to avoid repeated descriptions, and the same structural elements as the first to third embodiments are marked with the same figure marks as the first to third embodiments and their descriptions are omitted.

图12是表示第4实施方式的曝光装置U3的结构的图,图13是从上方(+Z方向)侧观察在图12所示的曝光装置U3内搬送的基板P时的图。图14是从-Y方向侧观察在图13所示的位置调整单元120a侧的最后一个辊126与曝光单元121c侧的第一个辊AR1之间搬送的基板P时的图,图15是从-X方向侧观察通过图12所示的旋转滚筒25搬送的基板P时的图。曝光装置(处理装置)U3具有位置调整单元120a、和相对于位置调整单元120a设在基板P的搬送方向的下流侧(+X方向侧)的曝光单元121c。位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c设为独立部件。也就是说,位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c可以以非接触的独立状态设置,或者,经由将位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c之间的基板P的搬送路和曝光单元121c之后的基板P的搬送路覆盖的波纹式等的防尘套121d而相互接触,但在不会将位置调整单元120a中产生的振动成分直接传递到曝光单元121c的状态(抑制振动传递的状态)下设置。曝光单元121c经由被动式或主动式的减振台(减振装置、防振装置)131而设在设置面(基台面)E上。位置调整单元120a经由基台200设在设置面E上。由此,不会经由设置面E向曝光单元121c传递来自其他处理装置U1、U2、U4~Un等的振动和来自位置调整单元120a的振动。也就是说,能够阻绝(隔绝)曝光单元121c与位置调整单元120a及其他处理装置U等之间的振动传递。换言之,成为位置调整单元120a及其他处理装置U等的振动与曝光单元121c之间的振动相互隔绝的状态。此外,基台200也可以是具有减振/防振功能的减振台(减振装置、防振装置)。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the structure of the exposure device U3 of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13 is a diagram when the substrate P transported in the exposure device U3 shown in FIG. 12 is viewed from the upper side (+Z direction). FIG. 14 is a diagram when the substrate P transported between the last roller 126 on the position adjustment unit 120a side shown in FIG. 13 and the first roller AR1 on the exposure unit 121c side is viewed from the -Y direction side, and FIG. 15 is a diagram when the substrate P transported by the rotating drum 25 shown in FIG. 12 is viewed from the -X direction side. The exposure device (processing device) U3 has a position adjustment unit 120a and an exposure unit 121c provided on the downstream side (+X direction side) of the transport direction of the substrate P relative to the position adjustment unit 120a. The position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are provided as independent components. That is, the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c may be arranged in a non-contact independent state, or may be arranged in contact with each other via a bellows-type dust cover 121d or the like covering the conveying path of the substrate P between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c and the conveying path of the substrate P after the exposure unit 121c, but in a state where the vibration component generated in the position adjustment unit 120a is not directly transmitted to the exposure unit 121c (a state where the transmission of vibration is suppressed). The exposure unit 121c is arranged on the installation surface (base surface) E via a passive or active vibration reduction table (vibration reduction device, vibration isolation device) 131. The position adjustment unit 120a is arranged on the installation surface E via the base 200. Thus, the vibration from other processing devices U1, U2, U4 to Un and the like and the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120a are not transmitted to the exposure unit 121c via the installation surface E. That is, it is possible to block (isolate) the transmission of vibration between the exposure unit 121c and the position adjustment unit 120a and other processing devices U. In other words, the vibration of the position adjustment unit 120a and other processing devices U is isolated from the vibration between the exposure unit 121c. In addition, the base 200 may also be a vibration reduction table (vibration reduction device, vibration isolation device) having a vibration reduction/vibration isolation function.

位置调整单元(位置调整装置)120a具有边缘位置控制器EPC3a、固定辊(引导辊)126、第1基板检测部202及下级控制装置(控制部)204。边缘位置控制器EPC3a、固定辊126及第1基板检测部202从基板P的搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧)按上述顺序设置。边缘位置控制器EPC3a以使具有规定张力(例如,20~200N的范围的固定值)而沿长边方向被搬送的基板P的宽度方向上的位置成为目标位置的方式对基板P的宽度方向上的位置进行调整(修正)。边缘位置控制器EPC3a能够在位置调整单元120a内沿基板P的宽度方向(Y方向)移动。边缘位置控制器EPC3a通过致动器206(参照图13)的驱动而沿Y方向移动,来调整基板P的宽度方向上的位置。边缘位置控制器EPC3a具有用于将基板P朝向固定辊126搬送的引导辊Rs1、Rs2及驱动辊NR。引导辊Rs1、Rs2对搬送的基板P进行引导,驱动辊NR边夹持基板P的表背两面边旋转来对基板P进行搬送。此外,图13的附图标记207a是能够旋转地支承引导辊Rs1、Rs2及驱动辊NR的支承部件(边缘位置控制器EPC3a的框架)。另外,附图标记207b是支承第1基板检测部202并且将固定辊126能够旋转地支承的支承部件(位置调整单元120a的主体框架),在该主体框架207b上能够沿Y方向移动地搭载有边缘位置控制器EPC3a的框架207a。The position adjustment unit (position adjustment device) 120a has an edge position controller EPC3a, a fixed roller (guide roller) 126, a first substrate detection unit 202, and a lower control device (control unit) 204. The edge position controller EPC3a, the fixed roller 126, and the first substrate detection unit 202 are arranged in the above order from the upstream side (-X direction side) of the conveying direction of the substrate P. The edge position controller EPC3a adjusts (corrects) the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed along the long side direction with a specified tension (for example, a fixed value in the range of 20 to 200N) so that the position in the width direction of the substrate P becomes a target position. The edge position controller EPC3a can move in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P within the position adjustment unit 120a. The edge position controller EPC3a moves in the Y direction by driving the actuator 206 (refer to Figure 13) to adjust the position in the width direction of the substrate P. The edge position controller EPC3a has guide rollers Rs1, Rs2 and a driving roller NR for conveying the substrate P toward the fixed roller 126. The guide rollers Rs1, Rs2 guide the conveyed substrate P, and the driving roller NR conveys the substrate P while rotating while clamping the front and back surfaces of the substrate P. In addition, reference numeral 207a in FIG. 13 is a supporting member (a frame of the edge position controller EPC3a) that can rotatably support the guide rollers Rs1, Rs2 and the driving roller NR. In addition, reference numeral 207b is a supporting member (a main frame of the position adjustment unit 120a) that supports the first substrate detection unit 202 and rotatably supports the fixed roller 126, and a frame 207a of the edge position controller EPC3a is mounted on the main frame 207b so as to be movable in the Y direction.

固定辊126将被边缘位置控制器EPC3a沿宽度方向进行位置调整后的基板P朝向曝光单元121c引导。通过该引导辊Rs1、Rs2、驱动辊NR及固定辊126,基板P在长边方向上被折曲而引导搬送。第1基板检测部(基板误差计测部、变化计测部)202对从固定辊126朝向曝光单元121c搬送的基板P的宽度方向上的位置进行检测。具体地说,如图13所示,第1基板检测部202由对基板P的宽度方向上的-Y侧的边缘部Ea的Y方向位置进行检测的检测部202a、和对+Y侧的边缘部Eb的Y方向位置进行检测的检测部202b构成,基于来自两个检测部202a、202b的检测信号,对基板P的宽度方向上的位置变化进行计测。而且,第1基板检测部202(202a、202b)也可以为除检测基板P的宽度方向的位置以外,还对与基板P的姿势变化(微小的倾斜)、基板P的变形(宽度方向上的伸缩)等相关的变化信息进行检测(计测)这样的传感器结构。第1基板检测部202所检测出的基板P的宽度方向上位置和基板P的变化信息被发送到下级控制装置204。此外,第1基板检测部202也可以对从边缘位置控制器EPC3a朝向固定辊126搬送的基板P的宽度方向上的位置进行检测。The fixed roller 126 guides the substrate P whose position is adjusted in the width direction by the edge position controller EPC3a toward the exposure unit 121c. The substrate P is bent in the long side direction and guided for transportation by the guide rollers Rs1, Rs2, the drive roller NR and the fixed roller 126. The first substrate detection unit (substrate error measuring unit, change measuring unit) 202 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P transported from the fixed roller 126 toward the exposure unit 121c. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the first substrate detection unit 202 is composed of a detection unit 202a for detecting the Y-direction position of the edge portion Ea on the -Y side of the substrate P in the width direction, and a detection unit 202b for detecting the Y-direction position of the edge portion Eb on the +Y side, and measures the position change in the width direction of the substrate P based on the detection signals from the two detection units 202a and 202b. Furthermore, the first substrate detection unit 202 (202a, 202b) may be a sensor structure that detects (measures) change information related to a change in the posture of the substrate P (a slight tilt), deformation of the substrate P (extension in the width direction), etc., in addition to detecting the position in the width direction of the substrate P. The position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the change information of the substrate P are sent to the lower-level control device 204. In addition, the first substrate detection unit 202 may detect the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed from the edge position controller EPC3a toward the fixed roller 126.

在通过第1基板检测部202对基板P的姿势变化、尤其与从固定辊126到曝光单元121c的水平面(XY面)平行的搬送路上的基板P的绕X轴(YZ面内)的微小倾斜进行计测的情况下,如图14所示,在检测部202a、202b各自中组入能够计测基板P的边缘部Ea、Eb各自的Z位置(基板P的表面的法线方向上的高度位置)Ze1、Ze2的变化的Z传感器。检测部202a、202b在基板P的搬送方向上从固定辊126仅以固定距离分开地配置,因此,在相对于固定辊126而曝光单元121c侧(辊AR1)相对于XY面微小倾斜的情况下,由检测部202a检测的Z位置Ze1与由检测部202b检测的Z位置Ze2之间的差值根据倾斜量而变化。通过像这样求出差值,固定辊126(位置调整单元120a)与曝光单元121c(辊AR1)在Z方向上的相对的位置变化ΔZs被抵消,从而正确地求出配置有检测部202a、202b的位置处的基板P的微小倾斜(绕X轴)。When the first substrate detection unit 202 is used to measure the posture change of the substrate P, in particular, the slight inclination of the substrate P around the X-axis (in the YZ plane) on the conveying path parallel to the horizontal plane (XY plane) from the fixed roller 126 to the exposure unit 121c, as shown in Fig. 14, a Z sensor capable of measuring the change of the Z position (the height position in the normal direction of the surface of the substrate P) Ze1, Ze2 of the edge portions Ea, Eb of the substrate P is incorporated in each of the detection units 202a, 202b. The detection units 202a, 202b are arranged to be separated from the fixed roller 126 by a fixed distance in the conveying direction of the substrate P. Therefore, when the exposure unit 121c side (roller AR1) is slightly inclined relative to the XY plane relative to the fixed roller 126, the difference between the Z position Ze1 detected by the detection unit 202a and the Z position Ze2 detected by the detection unit 202b changes according to the inclination amount. By calculating the difference in this way, the relative position change ΔZs between the fixed roller 126 (position adjustment unit 120a) and the exposure unit 121c (roller AR1) in the Z direction is offset, thereby accurately calculating the slight tilt (around the X-axis) of the substrate P at the position where the detection parts 202a and 202b are arranged.

若检测部202a、202b的Z传感器部的Y方向上的距离为Lz(固定值),则能够以tanΔψ=(Ze1-Ze2)/Lz计算出基板P的实际的倾斜量(角度Δψ)。像这样,通过组入到检测部202a、202b中的Z传感器计测的基板P的微小倾斜的变化也对应于固定辊126即位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的绕Z轴的相对的倾斜变化。作为Z传感器,能够利用光学式或静电容式的非接触型的间隙传感器等。另外,在图14的固定辊126与曝光单元121c侧的第一个辊(AR1)之间的基板P上,沿长边方向也赋予了固定的张力。因此,其间基板P挠曲的可能性小,但在张力小的情况下也有时会发生挠曲,可能对Z传感器的计测造成误差。由此,最好将检测部202a、202b(Z传感器部)在基板P的长边方向(搬送方向)上配置在曝光单元121c侧的第一个辊(AR1)的附近位置。If the distance in the Y direction of the Z sensor parts of the detection parts 202a and 202b is Lz (fixed value), the actual inclination amount (angle Δψ) of the substrate P can be calculated by tanΔψ=(Ze1-Ze2)/Lz. In this way, the slight change in the inclination of the substrate P measured by the Z sensor incorporated in the detection parts 202a and 202b also corresponds to the relative inclination change around the Z axis between the fixed roller 126, i.e., the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c. As the Z sensor, an optical or electrostatic non-contact gap sensor or the like can be used. In addition, a fixed tension is also applied to the substrate P between the fixed roller 126 and the first roller (AR1) on the side of the exposure unit 121c in Figure 14 along the long side. Therefore, the possibility of the substrate P bending is small, but bending sometimes occurs when the tension is small, which may cause errors in the measurement of the Z sensor. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the detection parts 202a and 202b (Z sensor parts) in the vicinity of the first roller (AR1) on the exposure unit 121c side in the longitudinal direction (conveying direction) of the substrate P.

此外,如图14所示,从固定辊126观察时,若在曝光单元121c(第一个辊AR1)于YZ面内倾斜的状态下搬送基板P,则由辊AR1折曲后的基板P的搬送方向(-Z方向)与XZ平面之间的平行性受损,并且在张力的作用下,基板P会向宽度方向的一侧(+Y方向或-Y方向)逐渐位移,结果是支承于旋转滚筒25的基板P也逐渐沿Y方向位移。虽然位置调整单元120a(边缘位置控制器EPC3a)能够以修正基板P的这样的Y方向上的位移的方式发挥功能,但也能够通过包含设在曝光单元121c侧的辊AR1在内的基板调整部214(详情将在后述)来进行修正。因此,基于由检测部202a、202b检测的与基板P的微小倾斜(绕X轴)相关的变化信息,控制位置调整单元120a和基板调整部214中的某一方或双方,由此能够高精度地维持支承于旋转滚筒25的基板P的Y方向上的位置。另外,关于到达旋转滚筒25的基板P的宽度方向上的位置调整,也能够将位置调整单元120a用于粗调整,将基板调整部214用于微调整。Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14 , when viewed from the fixed roller 126, if the substrate P is conveyed in a state where the exposure unit 121c (first roller AR1) is tilted in the YZ plane, the parallelism between the conveying direction (-Z direction) of the substrate P bent by the roller AR1 and the XZ plane is impaired, and the substrate P gradually displaces to one side in the width direction (+Y direction or -Y direction) under the action of tension, resulting in the substrate P supported by the rotating drum 25 also gradually displacing in the Y direction. Although the position adjustment unit 120a (edge position controller EPC3a) can function in a manner to correct such displacement of the substrate P in the Y direction, it can also be corrected by the substrate adjustment section 214 (details will be described later) including the roller AR1 provided on the exposure unit 121c side. Therefore, based on the change information related to the slight tilt (around the X-axis) of the substrate P detected by the detection units 202a and 202b, one or both of the position adjustment unit 120a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 can be controlled, thereby making it possible to maintain the position of the substrate P supported on the rotating drum 25 in the Y direction with high accuracy. In addition, regarding the position adjustment in the width direction of the substrate P reaching the rotating drum 25, the position adjustment unit 120a can be used for rough adjustment, and the substrate adjustment unit 214 can be used for fine adjustment.

下级控制装置204控制位置调整单元120a的边缘位置控制器EPC3a或基板调整部214等,来控制基板P的宽度方向上的位置。该下级控制装置204可以是上级控制装置5的一部分或全部,也可以是由上级控制装置5控制的与上级控制装置5不同的计算机。The lower control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a or the substrate adjustment unit 214 of the position adjustment unit 120a to control the position in the width direction of the substrate P. The lower control device 204 may be a part or all of the upper control device 5, or may be a computer different from the upper control device 5 and controlled by the upper control device 5.

曝光单元(图案化装置)121c具有基板支承机构12a、第2基板检测部208、照明机构13a、曝光头(图案形成部)210及下级控制装置(控制部)212。曝光单元121c收纳在调温腔室ECV内。该调温腔室ECV将内部保持为规定的温度,由此抑制在内部搬送的基板P的因温度产生的形状变化。该调温腔室ECV经由被动式或主动式的减振台131而配置在设置面E上。The exposure unit (patterning device) 121c includes a substrate support mechanism 12a, a second substrate detection unit 208, an illumination mechanism 13a, an exposure head (pattern forming unit) 210, and a lower control device (control unit) 212. The exposure unit 121c is accommodated in a temperature control chamber ECV. The temperature control chamber ECV maintains the interior at a predetermined temperature, thereby suppressing the shape change of the substrate P transported therein due to the temperature. The temperature control chamber ECV is arranged on the installation surface E via a passive or active vibration reduction table 131.

基板支承机构(搬送部)12a边支承从位置调整单元120a输送来的基板P边将其向下流侧(+X方向)搬送,从基板P的搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧)按顺序具有基板调整部214、引导辊Rs3、张力辊RT1、旋转滚筒25、张力辊RT2及驱动辊R5、R6。The substrate supporting mechanism (conveying unit) 12a supports the substrate P conveyed from the position adjustment unit 120a while conveying it to the downstream side (+X direction), and has a substrate adjustment unit 214, a guide roller Rs3, a tension roller RT1, a rotating drum 25, a tension roller RT2 and driving rollers R5 and R6 in order from the upstream side (-X direction side) of the conveying direction of the substrate P.

基板调整部214具有多个辊(AR1、RT3、AR2),一边通过调整基板P的宽度方向上的位置来修正基板P中产生的扭曲和褶皱一边将基板P沿搬送方向(+X方向)搬送。关于该基板调整部214的结构将在后说明。引导辊Rs3将通过基板调整部214对基板P的宽度方向上的位置进行调整后的基板P向旋转滚筒25搬送。旋转滚筒25边旋转边以圆周面保持基板P上要曝光规定图案的部分,同时将基板P向驱动辊R5、R6侧搬送。关于驱动辊R5、R6的功能如在上述第1实施方式中所述。张力辊RT1、RT2对卷绕地支承于旋转滚筒25的基板P赋予规定的张力。此外,图13的附图标记215是将基板调整部214的多个辊、引导辊Rs3、张力辊RT1、旋转滚筒25、张力辊RT2及驱动辊R5、R6能够旋转地支承的支承部件(曝光单元121c的主体框架)。The substrate adjustment unit 214 has a plurality of rollers (AR1, RT3, AR2), and transports the substrate P along the transport direction (+X direction) while correcting the distortion and wrinkles generated in the substrate P by adjusting the position in the width direction of the substrate P. The structure of the substrate adjustment unit 214 will be described later. The guide roller Rs3 transports the substrate P, whose position in the width direction of the substrate P is adjusted by the substrate adjustment unit 214, to the rotating drum 25. The rotating drum 25 rotates while holding the portion of the substrate P to be exposed to a prescribed pattern with its circumferential surface, and at the same time transports the substrate P to the side of the driving rollers R5 and R6. The functions of the driving rollers R5 and R6 are as described in the first embodiment above. The tension rollers RT1 and RT2 impart a prescribed tension to the substrate P supported by the rotating drum 25 in a wound manner. 13 denotes a supporting member (main frame of the exposure unit 121c) that rotatably supports the plurality of rollers of the substrate adjustment section 214, the guide roller Rs3, the tension roller RT1, the rotating drum 25, the tension roller RT2, and the driving rollers R5 and R6.

图16是表示基板调整部214的结构的图。基板调整部214具有调整辊AR1、AR2和张力辊RT3。调整辊AR1、张力辊RT3及调整辊AR2从基板P的搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧)按上述顺序设置。该调整辊AR1、AR2在施有规定的张力(tension)的状态下,以使基板P的搬送路径折曲的方式配置。具体地说,通过在调整辊AR1、AR2的下方侧(-Z方向侧)设置张力辊RT3,由调整辊AR1、AR2在施加了规定的张力的状态下将搬送路径折曲。由此,从位置调整单元120a沿+X方向搬送的基板P以被施加规定的张力的状态通过调整辊AR1被向下方(-Z方向)折曲而向张力辊RT3引导,从张力辊RT3向上方(+Z方向)搬送的基板P以被施加规定的张力的状态通过调整辊AR2被向+X方向折曲而向引导辊Rs3引导。此外,张力辊RT3以能够沿Z方向平行移动的方式,Y方向的两端被轴支承,在基板P被搬送的期间,沿-Z方向产生规定的作用力而对基板P赋予张力。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the structure of the substrate adjustment section 214. The substrate adjustment section 214 includes adjustment rollers AR1, AR2 and a tension roller RT3. The adjustment rollers AR1, the tension roller RT3 and the adjustment roller AR2 are arranged in the above order from the upstream side (-X direction side) of the conveying direction of the substrate P. The adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 are arranged in a manner that bends the conveying path of the substrate P under a state of applying a predetermined tension. Specifically, by arranging the tension roller RT3 on the lower side (-Z direction side) of the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2, the conveying path is bent by the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 under a state of applying a predetermined tension. Thus, the substrate P conveyed from the position adjustment unit 120a along the +X direction is bent downward (-Z direction) by the adjustment roller AR1 in a state of applying a predetermined tension and guided to the tension roller RT3, and the substrate P conveyed from the tension roller RT3 to the upper side (+Z direction) is bent in the +X direction by the adjustment roller AR2 in a state of applying a predetermined tension and guided to the guide roller Rs3. Moreover, the tension roller RT3 is axially supported at both ends in the Y direction so as to be movable in parallel in the Z direction, and generates a predetermined force in the -Z direction to apply tension to the substrate P while the substrate P is being conveyed.

调整辊AR1能够通过轴承214a相对于旋转轴AX3a旋转,调整辊AR2也同样地,能够通过轴承214b相对于旋转轴AX3b旋转。旋转轴AX3a、AX3b沿着Y方向平行地设置。调整辊AR1、AR2能够相对于沿着Y方向平行的轴倾斜。也就是说,调整辊AR1的旋转轴AX3a的一端侧(-Y方向侧)能够以另一端侧(+Y方向侧)为支点向Z方向及X方向微小移动。调整辊AR2也同样地,旋转轴AX3b的一端侧(-Y方向侧)能够以另一端侧(+Y方向侧)为支点向X方向及Z方向移动。旋转轴AX3a、AX3b的一端侧(-Y方向侧)的微小移动由未图示的压电元件等致动器驱动。通过使调整辊AR1、AR2微小倾斜,能够伴随着基板P的长边方向的搬送对基板P的宽度方向上的位置进行微调整,能够修正基板P中产生的微小扭曲和因基板P的内部应力而产生的微小的面内变形(或褶皱)。此外,在图16中,设为两个调整辊AR1、AR2在XY面内或YZ面内微小地倾斜,但也可以不使调整辊AR1、AR2倾斜而使张力辊RT1能够倾斜。而且,还可以不使调整辊AR1倾斜而使调整辊AR2和张力辊RT1能够倾斜。The adjustment roller AR1 can rotate relative to the rotation axis AX3a through the bearing 214a, and the adjustment roller AR2 can also rotate relative to the rotation axis AX3b through the bearing 214b. The rotation axes AX3a and AX3b are arranged in parallel along the Y direction. The adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 can be tilted relative to the axis parallel to the Y direction. In other words, one end side (-Y direction side) of the rotation axis AX3a of the adjustment roller AR1 can move slightly in the Z direction and the X direction with the other end side (+Y direction side) as a fulcrum. Similarly, for the adjustment roller AR2, one end side (-Y direction side) of the rotation axis AX3b can move in the X direction and the Z direction with the other end side (+Y direction side) as a fulcrum. The slight movement of one end side (-Y direction side) of the rotation axes AX3a and AX3b is driven by an actuator such as a piezoelectric element not shown. By slightly tilting the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2, the position of the substrate P in the width direction can be slightly adjusted as the substrate P is transported in the long side direction, and the slight distortion generated in the substrate P and the slight in-plane deformation (or wrinkles) generated by the internal stress of the substrate P can be corrected. In addition, in FIG. 16, the two adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 are slightly tilted in the XY plane or the YZ plane, but the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 can be tilted without tilting them, and the tension roller RT1 can be tilted. Moreover, the adjustment roller AR2 and the tension roller RT1 can be tilted without tilting the adjustment roller AR1.

第2基板检测部(基板误差计测部、变化计测部)208对从张力辊RT1朝向旋转滚筒25沿+Z方向搬送的基板P的宽度方向上的位置进行检测。具体地说,如图15所示,第2基板检测部208分别设在基板P的宽度方向的两端侧,对基板P的宽度方向上的两端部的边缘进行检测。图17A是表示第2基板检测部208的结构的图,图17B是表示通过第2基板检测部208照射于基板P的光束光Bm的图,图17C是表示由第2基板检测部208接受的光束光Bm的图。第2基板检测部208具有照射光束光Bm的照射系统216、和接受光束光Bm的受光系统218。照射系统216具有投光部220、柱面透镜222及反射镜224,受光系统218具有反射镜226、成像光学系统228及摄像元件230。投光部220包括发出光束光Bm的光源,将发出的光束光Bm朝向基板P照射。投光部220所照射的光束光Bm经由柱面透镜222及反射镜224而照射到基板P上。柱面透镜222如图17B所示,以使入射的光束光Bm在基板P上成为与基板P的Y方向平行的狭缝状的光束光Bm的方式,将入射的光束光Bm在Z方向上收敛。将该朝向基板P照射的光束光Bm的长度设为Lbm。朝向基板P侧照射的光束光Bm的至少一部分被基板P反射,不与基板P接触的剩余部分的光束光Bm不被基板P反射地保持直线前进。The second substrate detection unit (substrate error measuring unit, change measuring unit) 208 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed from the tension roller RT1 toward the rotating drum 25 in the +Z direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 , the second substrate detection unit 208 is respectively provided on both end sides in the width direction of the substrate P, and detects the edges of both end portions in the width direction of the substrate P. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the structure of the second substrate detection unit 208, FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the light beam Bm irradiated to the substrate P by the second substrate detection unit 208, and FIG. 17C is a diagram showing the light beam Bm received by the second substrate detection unit 208. The second substrate detection unit 208 includes an irradiation system 216 for irradiating the light beam Bm, and a light receiving system 218 for receiving the light beam Bm. The irradiation system 216 includes a light projecting unit 220, a cylindrical lens 222, and a reflector 224, and the light receiving system 218 includes a reflector 226, an imaging optical system 228, and an imaging element 230. The light projecting unit 220 includes a light source that emits a light beam Bm, and irradiates the emitted light beam Bm toward the substrate P. The light beam Bm irradiated by the light projecting unit 220 is irradiated onto the substrate P via the cylindrical lens 222 and the reflector 224. As shown in FIG. 17B , the cylindrical lens 222 converges the incident light beam Bm in the Z direction so that the incident light beam Bm becomes a slit-shaped light beam Bm parallel to the Y direction of the substrate P on the substrate P. The length of the light beam Bm irradiated toward the substrate P is set to Lbm. At least a portion of the light beam Bm irradiated toward the substrate P side is reflected by the substrate P, and the remaining portion of the light beam Bm that does not contact the substrate P is not reflected by the substrate P and keeps moving in a straight line.

在基板P反射的狭缝状的光束光Bm经由反射镜226向成像光学系统228入射。成像光学系统228使从反射镜226反射的光束光Bm在摄像元件230上成像,摄像元件230对入射的光束光Bm进行拍摄。该由摄像元件230拍摄的光束光Bm的长度,如图17C所示,为在基板P反射的光束光Bm的长度Lbm1,因此能够通过计测该Lbm1的长度来检测基板P的边缘的位置。通过具有这样的结构,第2基板检测部208能够高精度地检测从张力辊RT1朝向旋转滚筒25沿+Z方向搬送的基板P的宽度方向上的位置。另外,第2基板检测部208通过检测基板P的位置,能够检测(计测)与基板P的宽度方向上的位置变化、基板P的变形(宽度方向的伸缩)等相关的变化信息。第2基板检测部208所检测出的基板P的宽度方向上的位置和基板P的变化信息被发送到下级控制装置204。附图标记230a表示摄像元件230的拍摄区域。此外,第1基板检测部202的结构也可以是与第2基板检测部208相同的结构。The slit-shaped light beam Bm reflected by the substrate P is incident on the imaging optical system 228 via the reflector 226. The imaging optical system 228 images the light beam Bm reflected from the reflector 226 on the imaging element 230, and the imaging element 230 captures the incident light beam Bm. As shown in FIG17C , the length of the light beam Bm captured by the imaging element 230 is the length Lbm1 of the light beam Bm reflected by the substrate P, so the position of the edge of the substrate P can be detected by measuring the length Lbm1. With such a structure, the second substrate detection unit 208 can detect the position in the width direction of the substrate P transported from the tension roller RT1 toward the rotating drum 25 along the +Z direction with high accuracy. In addition, by detecting the position of the substrate P, the second substrate detection unit 208 can detect (measure) change information related to the position change in the width direction of the substrate P, the deformation of the substrate P (expansion and contraction in the width direction), and the like. The position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 and the change information of the substrate P are sent to the lower control device 204. Reference numeral 230a denotes an imaging area of the imaging element 230. The first substrate detection unit 202 may have the same structure as the second substrate detection unit 208.

曝光单元121c的各对准显微镜(基板误差计测部、变化计测部)AM1、AM2沿着基板P的宽度方向设有多个,对图15所示那样的形成在基板P上的对准标记Ks进行检测。在图15所示的例子中,对准标记Ks在基板P的两端部侧沿着基板P的长边方向以固定间隔形成,并且在沿基板P上的长边方向排列的曝光区域A7与曝光区域A7之间,沿着基板P的宽度方向以固定间隔设有五个。因此,为了能够检测形成在基板P上的对准标记Ks,对准显微镜AM1(参照图19)、AM2沿着基板P的宽度方向以固定间隔设有五个。通过由对准显微镜AM1、AM2检测对准标记Ks,能够高精度地检测边被支承于旋转滚筒25边被搬送的基板P的宽度方向上的位置。另外,对准显微镜AM1、AM2通过检测对准标记Ks的位置,能够检测(计测)与基板P的宽度方向上的位置变化、姿势变化、基板P的变形等相关的变化信息。Each alignment microscope (substrate error measuring unit, change measuring unit) AM1, AM2 of the exposure unit 121c is provided with a plurality of alignment microscopes along the width direction of the substrate P, and detects the alignment mark Ks formed on the substrate P as shown in FIG15. In the example shown in FIG15, the alignment mark Ks is formed at fixed intervals along the long side direction of the substrate P on both end sides of the substrate P, and five alignment marks Ks are provided at fixed intervals along the width direction of the substrate P between the exposure areas A7 and the exposure areas A7 arranged along the long side direction of the substrate P. Therefore, in order to detect the alignment mark Ks formed on the substrate P, five alignment microscopes AM1 (refer to FIG19) are provided at fixed intervals along the width direction of the substrate P. By detecting the alignment mark Ks by the alignment microscopes AM1, AM2, the position in the width direction of the substrate P while being supported on the rotating drum 25 and being conveyed can be detected with high precision. In addition, by detecting the position of the alignment mark Ks, the alignment microscopes AM1, AM2 can detect (measure) change information related to position change, posture change, deformation of the substrate P, etc. in the width direction of the substrate P.

该由对准显微镜AM1、AM2检测出的对准标记Ks的长边方向(搬送方向)和宽度方向各自上的位置信息被发送到下级控制装置212。下级控制装置212基于获得的对准标记Ks的位置信息,生成用于修正图案形成位置的修正信息并向曝光头(图案形成部)210发送,并且,对基板P的宽度方向上的位置及基板P的变化信息进行计算并向下级控制装置204发送。此外,图15的附图标记232表示各对准显微镜AM1的检测区域(检测视野),基板P的搬送方向(图15中为Z方向)上的五个检测区域232的位置设定在基板P与旋转滚筒25的外周面稳定地密接这样的位置。检测区域232的基板P上的大小根据对准标记Ks的大小和对准精度(位置计测精度)而设定,为100~500μm见方左右的大小。The position information of the alignment mark Ks in the long side direction (transportation direction) and the width direction detected by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 is sent to the lower control device 212. The lower control device 212 generates correction information for correcting the pattern forming position based on the obtained position information of the alignment mark Ks and sends it to the exposure head (pattern forming unit) 210, and calculates the position in the width direction of the substrate P and the change information of the substrate P and sends them to the lower control device 204. In addition, the reference numeral 232 in FIG. 15 represents the detection area (detection field of view) of each alignment microscope AM1, and the positions of the five detection areas 232 in the conveyance direction of the substrate P (Z direction in FIG. 15) are set at such a position that the substrate P is stably in close contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum 25. The size of the detection area 232 on the substrate P is set according to the size of the alignment mark Ks and the alignment accuracy (position measurement accuracy), and is about 100 to 500 μm square.

另外,如图12所示,在位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c之间,设有对位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的相对位置和位置变化所相关的变化信息进行检测(计测)的相对位置检测部(位置误差计测部、变化计测部)234。图18是表示相对位置检测部234的结构的图。相对位置检测部234设在位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c之间,且分别设在-Y方向的端部侧和+Y方向的端部侧。相对位置检测部234具有对YZ平面中的位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的相对的位置变化进行检测的第1检测部236、和对XZ平面中的位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的相对的位置变化进行检测的第2检测部238。由此,相对位置检测部234能够以三维(XYZ空间)检测位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的相对的位置和变化信息。In addition, as shown in FIG. 12 , a relative position detection unit (position error measurement unit, change measurement unit) 234 is provided between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c, which detects (measures) the relative position of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c and the change information related to the position change. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the structure of the relative position detection unit 234. The relative position detection unit 234 is provided between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c, and is provided at the end side in the -Y direction and the end side in the +Y direction, respectively. The relative position detection unit 234 has a first detection unit 236 that detects the relative position change of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c in the YZ plane, and a second detection unit 238 that detects the relative position change of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c in the XZ plane. Thus, the relative position detection unit 234 can detect the relative position and change information between the position adjustment unit 120 a and the exposure unit 121 c in three dimensions (XYZ space).

第1检测部236具有朝向+X方向照射激光的投光部240a、和接受投光部240a所照射的激光的受光部242a。第2检测部238具有朝向+Y方向照射激光的投光部240b、和接受投光部240b所照射的激光的受光部242b。第1检测部236的投光部240a及第2检测部238的投光部240b设在位置调整单元120a的与曝光单元121c相对的面侧(+X方向侧)。另外,第1检测部236的受光部242b及第2检测部238的受光部242b设在曝光单元121c的与位置调整单元120a相对的面侧(-X方向侧)。The first detection unit 236 includes a light projecting unit 240a that irradiates a laser beam toward the +X direction, and a light receiving unit 242a that receives the laser beam irradiated by the light projecting unit 240a. The second detection unit 238 includes a light projecting unit 240b that irradiates a laser beam toward the +Y direction, and a light receiving unit 242b that receives the laser beam irradiated by the light projecting unit 240b. The light projecting unit 240a of the first detection unit 236 and the light projecting unit 240b of the second detection unit 238 are provided on the surface side (+X direction side) of the position adjustment unit 120a that is opposite to the exposure unit 121c. In addition, the light receiving unit 242b of the first detection unit 236 and the light receiving unit 242b of the second detection unit 238 are provided on the surface side (-X direction side) of the exposure unit 121c that is opposite to the position adjustment unit 120a.

受光部242a、242b由四个分割传感器构成。也就是说,受光部242a、242b具有四个光电二极管(光电转换元件)244,使用该四个光电二极管244各自所接受的受光量之差(信号电平的差值)来检测与激光的光束中心垂直的面内的位置变化。向受光部242a入射的激光是沿+X方向前进的光,因此受光部242a检测与X方向垂直的YZ平面中的、激光的中心的位置和位置变化。另外,向受光部242b入射的激光是沿+Y方向前进的光,因此受光部242b检测与Y方向垂直的XZ平面中的、激光的中心的位置和位置变化。由此,能够三维地检测(计测)位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的相对位置和位置变化所相关的变化信息。尤其是,能够通过沿Y方向分开的一对第1检测部236的各检测信息的差值或平均,实时地计测位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的绕X轴的相对旋转误差(YZ面内的相对倾斜)和Y方向上的相对位置误差。另外,能够通过沿Y方向分开的一对第2检测部238的各检测信息的差值,实时地计测位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的绕Z轴的相对旋转误差(XY面内的相对倾斜)。The light receiving parts 242a and 242b are composed of four split sensors. That is, the light receiving parts 242a and 242b have four photodiodes (photoelectric conversion elements) 244, and the position change in the plane perpendicular to the center of the laser beam is detected using the difference in the amount of light received by each of the four photodiodes 244 (the difference in signal level). The laser incident on the light receiving part 242a is light advancing in the +X direction, so the light receiving part 242a detects the position and position change of the center of the laser in the YZ plane perpendicular to the X direction. In addition, the laser incident on the light receiving part 242b is light advancing in the +Y direction, so the light receiving part 242b detects the position and position change of the center of the laser in the XZ plane perpendicular to the Y direction. As a result, the change information related to the relative position and position change of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c can be detected (measured) in three dimensions. In particular, the relative rotation error around the X axis (relative tilt in the YZ plane) and the relative position error in the Y direction between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c can be measured in real time by the difference or average of each detection information of the pair of first detection units 236 separated in the Y direction. In addition, the relative rotation error around the Z axis (relative tilt in the XY plane) between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c can be measured in real time by the difference of each detection information of the pair of second detection units 238 separated in the Y direction.

返回到图12的说明,照明机构13a具有激光源,射出用于曝光的激光(曝光光束)LB。该激光LB可以是在370nm以下的波段具有峰值波长的紫外线光。激光LB也可以是以振荡频率Fs发光的脉冲光。照明机构13a所射出的激光LB向曝光头210入射。Returning to the description of FIG. 12 , the lighting mechanism 13a has a laser source, and emits a laser beam (exposure beam) LB for exposure. The laser beam LB may be ultraviolet light having a peak wavelength in a band below 370 nm. The laser beam LB may also be a pulsed light emitting at an oscillation frequency Fs. The laser beam LB emitted by the lighting mechanism 13a is incident on the exposure head 210.

曝光头210具有分别供来自照明机构13a的激光LB入射的多个描画单元DU(DU1~DU5)。也就是说,来自照明机构13a的激光LB被向具有反射镜、分束器等的光导入光学系统250引导后向多个描画单元DU(DU1~DU5)入射。曝光头210由基板支承机构12a搬送,在由旋转滚筒25的圆周面支承的基板P的一部分上,通过多个描画单元DU(DU1~DU5)来描画图案。曝光头210具有结构相同的多个描画单元DU(DU1~DU5),由此为所谓多光束型的曝光头210。描画单元DU1、DU3、DU5相对于旋转滚筒25的旋转轴AX2配置在基板P的搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧),描画单元DU2、DU4相对于旋转滚筒25的旋转轴AX2配置在基板P的搬送方向的下流侧(+X方向侧)。The exposure head 210 has a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5) into which the laser light LB from the lighting mechanism 13a is incident. That is, the laser light LB from the lighting mechanism 13a is guided to the light introduction optical system 250 having a reflector, a beam splitter, etc., and then incident on the plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5). The exposure head 210 is transported by the substrate support mechanism 12a, and a pattern is drawn by the plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5) on a part of the substrate P supported by the circumferential surface of the rotating drum 25. The exposure head 210 has a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5) having the same structure, and thus is a so-called multi-beam type exposure head 210. The drawing units DU1, DU3, and DU5 are arranged on the upstream side (-X direction side) of the conveying direction of the substrate P with respect to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating drum 25, and the drawing units DU2 and DU4 are arranged on the downstream side (+X direction side) of the conveying direction of the substrate P with respect to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating drum 25.

各描画单元DU使入射的激光LB在基板P上收敛而成为点光,并且,沿着扫描线通过旋转多面镜(polygon mirror)等高速地使该点光扫描。各描画单元DU的扫描线L设定为,如图19所示在Y方向(基板P的宽度方向)不是相互分离而是相接。在图19中,将描画单元DU1的扫描线L以L1表示,将描画单元DU2的扫描线L以L2表示。同样地,将描画单元DU3、DU4、DU5的扫描线L以L3、L4、L5表示。像这样,以通过全部描画单元DU1~DU5覆盖曝光区域A7的整个宽度方向的方式,由各描画单元DU分担扫描区域。此外,例如,若将一个描画单元DU下的Y方向的描画宽度(扫描线L的长度)设为20~50mm左右,则通过沿Y方向配置奇数号的描画单元DU1、DU3、DU5这三个、偶数号的描画单元DU2、DU4这两个、共计五个描画单元DU,能够将可描画的Y方向的宽度扩大到100~250mm左右。此外,对准显微镜AM1、AM2与扫描线L1、L3、L5相比设在基板P的搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧),并且,对边在旋转滚筒25的圆周面上紧密接触而被支承边被搬送的基板上形成的对准标记Ks进行检测。Each drawing unit DU converges the incident laser LB on the substrate P into a point light, and scans the point light at high speed along the scanning line by rotating a polygon mirror or the like. The scanning lines L of each drawing unit DU are set to be connected to each other in the Y direction (the width direction of the substrate P) instead of being separated from each other as shown in FIG. 19 . In FIG. 19 , the scanning line L of the drawing unit DU1 is represented by L1, and the scanning line L of the drawing unit DU2 is represented by L2. Similarly, the scanning lines L of the drawing units DU3, DU4, and DU5 are represented by L3, L4, and L5. In this way, the scanning area is shared by each drawing unit DU in such a way that the entire width direction of the exposure area A7 is covered by all the drawing units DU1 to DU5. Furthermore, for example, if the drawing width in the Y direction (the length of the scanning line L) under one drawing unit DU is set to about 20 to 50 mm, the width in the Y direction that can be drawn can be expanded to about 100 to 250 mm by arranging three odd-numbered drawing units DU1, DU3, and DU5 and two even-numbered drawing units DU2 and DU4 in the Y direction, for a total of five drawing units DU. Furthermore, the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 are arranged on the upstream side (-X direction side) of the conveying direction of the substrate P compared to the scanning lines L1, L3, and L5, and detect the alignment marks Ks formed on the substrate that is conveyed while being supported in close contact with the circumferential surface of the rotating drum 25.

该描画单元DU如国际公开第2013/146184号小册子(参照图36)所公开那样为公知技术,但使用图20对描画单元DU简单地进行说明。此外,各描画单元DU(DU1~DU5)具有相同的结构,因此仅说明描画单元DU2,对于其他描画单元DU则省略说明。The drawing unit DU is a known technology as disclosed in International Publication No. 2013/146184 (see FIG36 ), but the drawing unit DU will be briefly described using FIG20 . In addition, since the drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5) have the same structure, only the drawing unit DU2 will be described, and the description of the other drawing units DU will be omitted.

如图20所示,描画单元DU2具有例如聚光透镜252、描画用光学元件(光调制器)254、吸收体256、准直透镜258、反射镜260、柱面透镜262、聚焦透镜264、反射镜266、多面镜(光扫描部件)268、反射镜270、f-θ透镜272及柱面透镜274。As shown in Figure 20, the drawing unit DU2 has, for example, a focusing lens 252, an optical element for drawing (light modulator) 254, an absorber 256, a collimating lens 258, a reflector 260, a cylindrical lens 262, a focusing lens 264, a reflector 266, a polygonal mirror (light scanning component) 268, a reflector 270, an f-θ lens 272 and a cylindrical lens 274.

向描画单元DU2入射的激光LB从铅垂方向的上方朝向下方(-Z方向)前进,经由聚光透镜252向描画用光学元件254入射。聚光透镜252使向描画用光学元件254入射的激光LB在描画用光学元件254内以成为光束腰的方式聚光(收敛)。描画用光学元件254相对于激光LB具有透射性,使用例如声光元件(AOM:Acousto-Optic Modulator)。The laser light LB incident on the drawing unit DU2 travels from the upper part to the lower part (-Z direction) in the vertical direction, and is incident on the drawing optical element 254 via the condenser lens 252. The condenser lens 252 condenses (converges) the laser light LB incident on the drawing optical element 254 to form a beam waist in the drawing optical element 254. The drawing optical element 254 is transmissive to the laser light LB, and an acousto-optic modulator (AOM) is used, for example.

描画用光学元件254在来自下级控制装置212的驱动信号(高频信号)为off的状态时,将入射的激光LB向吸收体256侧透射,在来自下级控制装置212的驱动信号(高频信号)为on的状态时,使入射的激光LB绕射而朝向反射镜260。吸收体256是为了防止激光LB向外部泄漏而吸收激光LB的光阱(light trap)。像这样,通过使要向描画用光学元件254施加的描画用的驱动信号(超声波的频率)与图案数据(白黑)相应地高速地进行on/off,对激光LB朝向反射镜260或朝向吸收体256进行切换。这意味着,当从基板P上观察时,到达感光面的激光LB(点光SP)的强度与图案数据相应地被高速调制为高电平和低电平(例如,零电平)中的某一方。When the driving signal (high frequency signal) from the lower control device 212 is off, the optical element 254 for drawing transmits the incident laser light LB to the absorber 256 side, and when the driving signal (high frequency signal) from the lower control device 212 is on, the incident laser light LB is diffracted and directed toward the reflector 260. The absorber 256 is a light trap that absorbs the laser light LB to prevent the laser light LB from leaking to the outside. In this way, by turning on/off the driving signal (frequency of ultrasonic waves) for drawing to be applied to the optical element 254 for drawing at high speed according to the pattern data (white and black), the laser light LB is switched toward the reflector 260 or toward the absorber 256. This means that when observed from the substrate P, the intensity of the laser light LB (point light SP) reaching the photosensitive surface is modulated at high speed to one of a high level and a low level (for example, a zero level) according to the pattern data.

准直透镜258使从描画用光学元件254朝向反射镜260的激光LB成为平行光。反射镜260使入射的激光LB向-X方向反射,经由柱面透镜262、聚焦透镜264向反射镜266照射。反射镜266将入射的激光LB向多面镜268照射。多面镜(旋转多面镜)268通过旋转而使激光LB的反射角连续地变化,沿扫描方向(基板P的宽度方向)使照射于基板P上的激光LB的位置扫描。多面镜268通过未图示的旋转驱动源(例如,马达和减速机构等)而以固定的速度(例如1万转/分)旋转。The collimating lens 258 makes the laser light LB from the drawing optical element 254 toward the reflector 260 into parallel light. The reflector 260 reflects the incident laser light LB in the -X direction and irradiates it to the reflector 266 via the cylindrical lens 262 and the focusing lens 264. The reflector 266 irradiates the incident laser light LB to the polygon mirror 268. The polygon mirror (rotating polygon mirror) 268 continuously changes the reflection angle of the laser light LB by rotating, and scans the position of the laser light LB irradiated on the substrate P along the scanning direction (the width direction of the substrate P). The polygon mirror 268 rotates at a fixed speed (for example, 10,000 rpm) by a rotation drive source (for example, a motor and a reduction mechanism, etc.) not shown in the figure.

设在反射镜260与反射镜266之间的柱面透镜262与聚焦透镜264协同地,在与上述扫描方向正交的非扫描方向(Z方向)上使激光LB在多面镜268的反射面上聚光(收敛)。通过该柱面透镜262,即使存在上述反射面相对于Z方向倾斜的情况(从XY面的法线与上述反射面的平衡状态倾斜),也能够抑制其影响,抑制照射在基板P上的激光LB的照射位置沿X方向偏移。The cylindrical lens 262 provided between the reflector 260 and the reflector 266 cooperates with the focusing lens 264 to focus (converge) the laser light LB on the reflection surface of the polygon mirror 268 in the non-scanning direction (Z direction) orthogonal to the scanning direction. The cylindrical lens 262 can suppress the influence of the reflection surface being tilted relative to the Z direction (tilted from the equilibrium state between the normal line of the XY plane and the reflection surface) and suppress the irradiation position of the laser light LB irradiated on the substrate P from shifting in the X direction.

由多面镜268反射的激光LB通过反射镜270向-Z方向反射,向具有与Z轴平行的光轴AXu的f-θ透镜272入射。该f-θ透镜272为使投射于基板P的激光LB的主光线在扫描中始终成为基板P的表面的法线这样的远心系统,由此,能够沿Y方向准确地等速度地扫描激光LB。从f-θ透镜272照射的激光LB经由母线与Y方向平行的柱面透镜274,成为直径几μm左右的大致圆形的微小的点光SP而照射到基板P上。点光(扫描点光)SP通过多面镜268沿着在Y方向上延伸的扫描线L2沿一个方向一维地扫描。The laser LB reflected by the polygon mirror 268 is reflected in the -Z direction by the reflector 270 and is incident on the f-θ lens 272 having an optical axis AXu parallel to the Z axis. The f-θ lens 272 is a telecentric system that allows the main light of the laser LB projected on the substrate P to always be the normal line of the surface of the substrate P during scanning, thereby enabling the laser LB to be accurately scanned at a constant speed along the Y direction. The laser LB irradiated from the f-θ lens 272 passes through a cylindrical lens 274 whose generatrix is parallel to the Y direction, and becomes a tiny point light SP of a roughly circular shape with a diameter of about several μm and is irradiated onto the substrate P. The point light (scanning point light) SP is scanned one-dimensionally in one direction along the scanning line L2 extending in the Y direction by the polygon mirror 268.

下级控制装置212控制照明机构13a及曝光头210等,来向基板P赋予图案。也就是说,下级控制装置212控制照明机构13a来照射激光LB,并且基于对准显微镜AM1所检测出的对准标记Ks的位置,来控制曝光头210的各描画单元DU所具有的描画用光学元件254,由此,在基板P上的规定位置、即曝光区域A7对图案进行描画曝光。该下级控制装置212可以是上级控制装置5的一部分或全部,也可以是被上级控制装置5控制的、与上级控制装置5不同的计算机。The lower control device 212 controls the lighting mechanism 13a and the exposure head 210, etc., to impart a pattern to the substrate P. That is, the lower control device 212 controls the lighting mechanism 13a to irradiate the laser LB, and controls the drawing optical element 254 of each drawing unit DU of the exposure head 210 based on the position of the alignment mark Ks detected by the alignment microscope AM1, thereby drawing and exposing the pattern at a predetermined position on the substrate P, that is, the exposure area A7. The lower control device 212 may be part or all of the upper control device 5, or may be a computer controlled by the upper control device 5 and different from the upper control device 5.

在此,通过在基板P的长边方向与旋转滚筒25的旋转轴AX2正交且在基板P上没有产生扭曲或褶皱等的状态下将基板P向旋转滚筒25搬送,图案向基板P的曝光精度提高。因此,期望以使曝光装置U3的进行基板搬送的各辊(Rs1~Rs3、NR、126、AR1、AR2、RT1~RT3、R5、R6)及旋转滚筒25的旋转轴相互沿着Y方向平行地配置,且以基板P的长边方向相对于这些各辊及旋转滚筒25的旋转轴正交的方式搬送基板P。Here, by conveying the substrate P to the rotating drum 25 in a state where the long side direction of the substrate P is orthogonal to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating drum 25 and no distortion or wrinkles are generated on the substrate P, the exposure accuracy of the pattern on the substrate P is improved. Therefore, it is desirable that the rotation axes of the rollers (Rs1 to Rs3, NR, 126, AR1, AR2, RT1 to RT3, R5, R6) for conveying the substrate of the exposure device U3 and the rotating drum 25 are arranged parallel to each other along the Y direction, and the substrate P is conveyed in a manner that the long side direction of the substrate P is orthogonal to the rotation axes of these rollers and the rotating drum 25.

但是,实际上,存在各辊(Rs1~Rs3、NR、126、AR1、AR2、RT1~RT3、R5、R6)的旋转轴微妙地偏移设置、各辊的旋转轴不相互平行的情况。另外,也存在由于因振动等导致位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的位置相对变化、而位置调整单元120a的辊的旋转轴与曝光单元121c的辊的旋转轴变得不平行的情况。由此,在基板P的内部产生微小的应力紊乱、扭曲、褶皱等,在基板P的长边方向相对于旋转滚筒25的旋转轴AX2稍微倾斜的状态下进行卷绕,或基板P在与应描画的图案的线宽度尺寸相比大幅变形(面内应变)的状态下支承于旋转滚筒25。However, in reality, the rotation axes of the rollers (Rs1 to Rs3, NR, 126, AR1, AR2, RT1 to RT3, R5, R6) are slightly offset and the rotation axes of the rollers are not parallel to each other. In addition, due to the relative change of the positions of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c caused by vibration, etc., the rotation axis of the roller of the position adjustment unit 120a and the rotation axis of the roller of the exposure unit 121c become non-parallel. As a result, minute stress disturbances, distortions, wrinkles, etc. are generated inside the substrate P, and the substrate P is wound in a state where the long side direction is slightly tilted relative to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating drum 25, or the substrate P is supported on the rotating drum 25 in a state where it is greatly deformed (in-plane strain) compared to the line width dimension of the pattern to be drawn.

因此,在第4实施方式中,下级控制装置204基于第1基板检测部202、第2基板检测部208、对准显微镜AM1、AM2及相对位置检测部234的检测结果,来控制边缘位置控制器EPC3a及基板调整部214。Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the lower control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on the detection results of the first substrate detection unit 202 , the second substrate detection unit 208 , the alignment microscopes AM1 , AM2 , and the relative position detection unit 234 .

详细地说,下级控制装置204基于第1基板检测部202所检测出的基板P的宽度方向上的位置和基板P的变化信息来控制边缘位置控制器EPC3a的致动器(驱动机构)206,由此来调整基板P的宽度方向上的位置。例如,下级控制装置204对根据由第1基板检测部202检测出的基板P的两端部的边缘的位置求出的Y方向上的中心位置与目标位置之间的差值进行计算,以使该计算出的差值为零(0)的方式对致动器206进行反馈控制,使基板P沿Y方向移动。由此,能够使从位置调整单元120a搬送的基板P的宽度方向的位置成为目标位置,从而能够抑制在基板P上产生微小的扭曲或褶皱等。由此,由于能够使卷绕于旋转滚筒25的基板P的Y方向上的位置高精度地固定,所以能够在各对准显微镜AM1的检测区域(检测视野)232内可靠地持续捕捉沿基板P的长边方向排列的多个对准标记Ks。In detail, the lower control device 204 controls the actuator (driving mechanism) 206 of the edge position controller EPC3a based on the position of the substrate P in the width direction detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the change information of the substrate P, thereby adjusting the position of the substrate P in the width direction. For example, the lower control device 204 calculates the difference between the center position in the Y direction obtained based on the positions of the edges of the two ends of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the target position, and performs feedback control on the actuator 206 in such a way that the calculated difference is zero (0), so that the substrate P moves in the Y direction. In this way, the position of the substrate P in the width direction conveyed from the position adjustment unit 120a can be made the target position, thereby suppressing the generation of slight distortion or wrinkles on the substrate P. In this way, since the position of the substrate P wound on the rotating drum 25 in the Y direction can be fixed with high precision, a plurality of alignment marks Ks arranged in the long side direction of the substrate P can be reliably and continuously captured in the detection area (detection field of view) 232 of each alignment microscope AM1.

另外,下级控制装置204使用与相对位置检测部234所检测出的位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的相对位置和位置变化相关的变化信息,来控制边缘位置控制器EPC3a的致动器206,由此,能够尽早地修正基板P的宽度方向上的位置变化(伴随倾斜状态变化的、基板P向宽度方向的移位)。另外,下级控制装置204基于与相对位置检测部234所检测出的相对位置和位置变化相关的信息,来调整基板调整部214的调整辊AR1、AR2的倾斜角度,由此,调整基板P的宽度方向上的位置。该调整辊AR1、AR2的倾斜角度的调整能够通过使上述压电元件等致动器(驱动部)驱动来执行。由此,即使在位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的相对位置发生了变化的情况下,也能够将向旋转滚筒25搬送的基板P的宽度方向上的位置高精度地响应性高地持续设定于目标位置,从而能够抑制在基板P上产生微小的扭曲或褶皱等。In addition, the lower control device 204 controls the actuator 206 of the edge position controller EPC3a using the change information related to the relative position and position change between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c detected by the relative position detection unit 234, thereby being able to correct the position change in the width direction of the substrate P (the displacement of the substrate P in the width direction accompanied by the change in the tilt state) as soon as possible. In addition, the lower control device 204 adjusts the tilt angle of the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 of the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on the information related to the relative position and position change detected by the relative position detection unit 234, thereby adjusting the position in the width direction of the substrate P. The adjustment of the tilt angle of the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 can be performed by driving the actuator (driving unit) such as the piezoelectric element. Thus, even if the relative positions of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c change, the position of the substrate P in the width direction transported to the rotating drum 25 can be continuously set at the target position with high precision and high responsiveness, thereby suppressing the generation of slight distortions or wrinkles on the substrate P.

另外,根据对准显微镜AM1、AM2所检测出的对准标记Ks的位置,也可知基板P的宽度方向上的位置、基板P的微小的扭曲或褶皱等的基板P的姿势变化、变形所相关的变化信息。因此,下级控制装置204基于检测出的对准标记Ks的位置,来控制边缘位置控制器EPC3a(致动器206)及基板调整部214(上述压电元件等致动器),由此调整基板P的宽度方向上的位置。由此,能够将向旋转滚筒25搬送的基板P的宽度方向上的位置高精度地响应性高地设为目标位置,从而能够抑制在基板P上产生微小的扭曲或褶皱等。In addition, based on the position of the alignment mark Ks detected by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2, the position in the width direction of the substrate P, the slight distortion or wrinkles of the substrate P, and the change information related to the deformation of the substrate P can also be known. Therefore, the lower-level control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a (actuator 206) and the substrate adjustment unit 214 (actuators such as the above-mentioned piezoelectric element) based on the detected position of the alignment mark Ks, thereby adjusting the position in the width direction of the substrate P. As a result, the position in the width direction of the substrate P transported to the rotating drum 25 can be set to the target position with high precision and high responsiveness, thereby suppressing the occurrence of slight distortion or wrinkles on the substrate P.

另外,下级控制装置204基于第2基板检测部208所检测出的将要搬送到旋转滚筒25的基板P的宽度方向上的位置,确认基板P的宽度方向上的位置是否位于目标位置,是否在基板P上产生了扭曲(倾斜)等。在基板P的扭曲(倾斜)的检测中,在增大图17A中说明的检测系统的光束光Bm相对于基板P的入射角而基板P沿表面的法线方向(图17A中为X方向)移位的情况下,只要利用在摄像元件230的摄像区域230a内光束Bm的反射像Bm会沿Z方向移位这一情况即可。第2基板检测部208也与基板P的两侧的边缘部Ea、Eb分别对应地设置,因此,通过对反射光束Bm的像的在摄像区域230a内向Z方向的移位量进行比较(求出差值),也能够求出基板P在宽度方向上的微小的倾斜量。In addition, the lower control device 204 checks whether the position in the width direction of the substrate P to be conveyed to the rotating drum 25 is located at the target position, whether distortion (tilt) has occurred on the substrate P, etc., based on the position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208. In the detection of the distortion (tilt) of the substrate P, when the incident angle of the light beam Bm of the detection system illustrated in FIG. 17A relative to the substrate P is increased and the substrate P is displaced in the normal direction of the surface (in the X direction in FIG. 17A), it is sufficient to use the fact that the reflected image Bm of the light beam Bm is displaced in the Z direction in the imaging area 230a of the imaging element 230. The second substrate detection unit 208 is also provided corresponding to the edge portions Ea and Eb on both sides of the substrate P, respectively. Therefore, by comparing the displacement amount of the image of the reflected light beam Bm in the Z direction in the imaging area 230a (obtaining the difference), the slight tilt amount of the substrate P in the width direction can also be obtained.

并且,在基板P的宽度方向上的位置不位于目标位置的情况下,下级控制装置204基于第2基板检测部208所检测出的基板P的宽度方向上的位置和基板P的变化信息,来控制边缘位置控制器EPC3a(致动器206)及基板调整部214(上述压电元件等致动器),由此,调整基板P的宽度方向上的位置。由此,能够使向旋转滚筒25搬送的基板P的宽度方向上的位置成为目标位置。Furthermore, when the position in the width direction of the substrate P is not at the target position, the lower control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a (actuator 206) and the substrate adjustment unit 214 (actuator such as the above-mentioned piezoelectric element) based on the position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 and the change information of the substrate P, thereby adjusting the position in the width direction of the substrate P. As a result, the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed to the rotating drum 25 can be made the target position.

但是,由于第2基板检测部208配置在基板P即将卷绕于旋转滚筒25的位置,所以在该位置突然产生基板P的宽度方向上的明显变化、例如,对准标记Ks从对准显微镜AM1的检测区域232脱离这样的明显的位置偏移错误的情况下,难以在曝光区域A7中将应形成的图案精密地定位。在这样的情况下,在对准标记Ks被捕捉于检测区域232内之前,执行错误程序(eroor sequence(再次尝试动作等),如中止针对曝光区域A7的图案形成并跳过,或暂时使基板P仅以一定长度量反转,并再次边沿正向搬送边基于对准显微镜AM1再次检测对准标记Ks等。However, since the second substrate detection unit 208 is arranged at a position where the substrate P is about to be wound around the rotating drum 25, it is difficult to accurately position the pattern to be formed in the exposure area A7 when a significant change in the width direction of the substrate P suddenly occurs at this position, for example, when the alignment mark Ks is separated from the detection area 232 of the alignment microscope AM1. In such a case, before the alignment mark Ks is captured in the detection area 232, an error sequence (an retries operation, etc.) is executed, such as terminating and skipping the pattern formation for the exposure area A7, or temporarily reversing the substrate P by only a certain length, and then re-detecting the alignment mark Ks based on the alignment microscope AM1 while conveying it in the forward direction.

像这样,在第4实施方式中,也能够将曝光单元121c与位置调整单元120a分别以独立状态(振动的传递被隔绝的状态)设置。因此,曝光单元121c能够通过减振台131减少来自位置调整单元120a的振动,能够得到与上述第1实施方式相同的效果。而且,在第4实施方式中,下级控制装置204基于第1基板检测部202、第2基板检测部208及对准显微镜AM1、AM2的检测结果,来控制边缘位置控制器EPC3a及基板调整部214。由此,能够提高基于曝光头210对基板P生成的图案的曝光精度。下级控制装置204基于相对位置检测部234的检测结果,来控制边缘位置控制器EPC3a及基板调整部214。由此,即使在位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的相对位置发生了变化的情况下,也能够提高基于曝光头210对基板P生成的图案的曝光精度。As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the exposure unit 121c and the position adjustment unit 120a can be provided in an independent state (a state where the transmission of vibration is isolated). Therefore, the exposure unit 121c can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120a through the vibration reduction table 131, and the same effect as the first embodiment can be obtained. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the lower control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on the detection results of the first substrate detection unit 202, the second substrate detection unit 208, and the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2. Thus, the exposure accuracy of the pattern generated by the exposure head 210 on the substrate P can be improved. The lower control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on the detection results of the relative position detection unit 234. Thus, even if the relative position of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c changes, the exposure accuracy of the pattern generated by the exposure head 210 on the substrate P can be improved.

此外,在上述第4实施方式中,为在曝光装置U3内设有位置调整单元120a和曝光单元121c的结构,但只要是从基板P的搬送方向观察时曝光单元121c紧接位置调整单元120a之后设置的结构即可。因此,也可以不在曝光装置U3内设置位置调整单元120a。该情况下,位置调整单元120a可以在从基板P的搬送方向观察时,设在配置于图1那样的曝光装置U3紧前的处理装置U(U2)侧。或者,在基板供给装置2设于曝光装置U3紧前的情况下,在该基板供给装置2内设置位置调整单元120a的功能。In addition, in the fourth embodiment described above, the exposure device U3 is provided with the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c, but the exposure unit 121c may be provided immediately after the position adjustment unit 120a when viewed from the conveying direction of the substrate P. Therefore, the position adjustment unit 120a may not be provided in the exposure device U3. In this case, the position adjustment unit 120a may be provided on the side of the processing device U (U2) immediately before the exposure device U3 as shown in FIG. 1 when viewed from the conveying direction of the substrate P. Alternatively, in the case where the substrate supply device 2 is provided immediately before the exposure device U3, the function of the position adjustment unit 120a is provided in the substrate supply device 2.

另外,基于曝光装置U3、曝光单元121、121c等(第2处理单元)进行的光图案化工序紧前的工序,与在基板P的表面上形成(涂敷)液状的感光层的工序、使该感光层干燥(烘烤)的工序成套。但是,在作为感光层使用干式膜的情况下,成为使用积层装置等压接式的转印装置将干式膜上的感光层通过压接而转印到作为被曝光基板的基板P的表面上的工序(感光层的形成工序),也存在不需要干燥工序的情况。因此,作为掌管光图案化工序紧前的工序的前处理装置(第1处理单元),为在基板P的表面上形成感光层的感光层形成装置、或将基板P干燥的干燥(加热)装置,能够在这些前处理装置内的基板搬送路的下流侧(基板搬出部)或该前处理装置与光图案化装置之间设置位置调整单元120a的功能。In addition, the process immediately before the photopatterning process performed by the exposure device U3, exposure units 121, 121c, etc. (second processing unit) is a set of a process of forming (coating) a liquid photosensitive layer on the surface of the substrate P and a process of drying (baking) the photosensitive layer. However, in the case of using a dry film as the photosensitive layer, it becomes a process (photosensitive layer formation process) of transferring the photosensitive layer on the dry film to the surface of the substrate P as the exposed substrate by pressing using a pressure-contact transfer device such as a lamination device, and there is also a case where a drying process is not required. Therefore, as a pre-processing device (first processing unit) in charge of the process immediately before the photopatterning process, a photosensitive layer forming device that forms a photosensitive layer on the surface of the substrate P, or a drying (heating) device that dries the substrate P, the function of the position adjustment unit 120a can be set on the downstream side (substrate unloading section) of the substrate conveying path in these pre-processing devices or between the pre-processing device and the photopatterning device.

另外,作为图案化工序,在使用印刷机的情况下,作为其紧前的工序,实施为了提高墨水向基板P表面的紧密附着性而对基板P的表面整体、或仅对应形成图案的部分进行改性处理的工序(赋予疏液性/亲液性的选择性赋予工序等)。这样的表面改性处理工序也在单独的或多个前处理装置中实施,因此,能够在设于印刷机紧前的前处理装置内的基板搬送路的下流侧(基板搬出部)、或该前处理装置与印刷机之间设置位置调整单元120a的功能。In addition, as a patterning process, when a printer is used, as a process immediately before the patterning process, a process of modifying the entire surface of the substrate P or only the portion corresponding to the pattern formation in order to improve the close adhesion of the ink to the surface of the substrate P (a selective imparting process of imparting liquid repellency/liquid affinity, etc.) is implemented. Such a surface modification process is also implemented in a single or multiple pre-processing devices, so the function of the position adjustment unit 120a can be provided on the downstream side (substrate unloading portion) of the substrate conveying path in the pre-processing device immediately before the printer, or between the pre-processing device and the printer.

在上述第4实施方式中,在位置调整单元120a上设置第1基板检测部202且在曝光单元121c上设置第2基板检测部208,但也可以仅设置第1基板检测部202及第2基板检测部208中的某一方。另外,也可以不设置第1基板检测部202及第2基板检测部208双方。这是因为,即使没有第1基板检测部202及第2基板检测部208,也能够通过对准显微镜AM1、AM2来检测基板P的宽度方向上的位置等。In the fourth embodiment, the first substrate detection unit 202 is provided on the position adjustment unit 120a and the second substrate detection unit 208 is provided on the exposure unit 121c, but only one of the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection unit 208 may be provided. In addition, both the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection unit 208 may not be provided. This is because even without the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection unit 208, the position in the width direction of the substrate P can be detected by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2.

在上述第4实施方式中,作为曝光装置说明了处理装置U3,但只要是能够对基板P赋予图案的图案形成装置即可。作为图案形成装置,例如,除曝光装置以外,可列举通过涂敷墨水对基板P赋予图案的喷墨印刷机等。该情况下,曝光头210置换成具有通过使墨水材料成为液滴并选择性地赋予而在基板P上描画图案的多个喷嘴的喷嘴头部(图案形成部),曝光单元121、121a~121c置换成具有图案形成部的图案化装置。另外,在上述第1~第3实施方式中也同样地,处理装置U3可以是对基板P赋予图案的图案形成装置。In the fourth embodiment described above, the processing device U3 is described as an exposure device, but any pattern forming device that can impart a pattern to the substrate P will suffice. As a pattern forming device, for example, in addition to the exposure device, an inkjet printer that imparts a pattern to the substrate P by applying ink can be cited. In this case, the exposure head 210 is replaced with a nozzle head (pattern forming unit) having a plurality of nozzles that draw a pattern on the substrate P by making the ink material into droplets and selectively imparting it, and the exposure units 121, 121a to 121c are replaced with a patterning device having a pattern forming unit. In addition, in the first to third embodiments described above, the processing device U3 can also be a pattern forming device that imparts a pattern to the substrate P.

如上述各实施方式中说明那样,在基板P上形成电子器件用的微细图案的曝光装置或喷墨印刷机等图案化装置中,在基板P上将图案精密地定位而形成是重要的。作为使该定位精度降低这样的外部干扰因素之一的振动,从设置于附近的处理装置中内置的空压用或液体用的压缩机或泵等产生,经由工厂的地面而传递到曝光头(图案形成部)210、支承基板P的旋转滚筒25等支承部件。为了隔绝该振动传递的路径,在图案化装置上设置防振装置(减振台131等)是有效的。另外,期望使工厂的地面(基础)尽可能牢固、且施工成共振频率低,在上述的各实施方式中,即使地面条件不这么严格,也能将基板P精密地搬送并实现高精度的图案化。As described in the above embodiments, in a patterning device such as an exposure device or an inkjet printer that forms a fine pattern for an electronic device on a substrate P, it is important to precisely position and form the pattern on the substrate P. Vibration, which is one of the external disturbance factors that reduces the positioning accuracy, is generated by a compressor or pump for air or liquid built into a nearby processing device, and is transmitted to the exposure head (pattern forming unit) 210, the rotating drum 25 that supports the substrate P, and other supporting parts via the factory floor. In order to isolate the path of the vibration transmission, it is effective to provide a vibration-proof device (vibration-damping table 131, etc.) on the patterning device. In addition, it is desirable to make the factory floor (foundation) as strong as possible and to construct it with a low resonance frequency. In the above embodiments, even if the ground conditions are not so strict, the substrate P can be precisely transported and high-precision patterning can be achieved.

例如,在构筑生产线时,为了避免从图案化装置(曝光单元121、121a~121c)通过的基板P沿宽度方向移位,而进行图案化装置内的辊与图案化装置的上游侧的处理装置(位置调整单元120、120a)内的辊之间的平行化作业,但在开始基板P的处理后,存在随着时间经过因装置载荷等的影响而地面局部稍微凹陷而倾斜的情况。即使在这样的情况下,也能够通过第1基板检测部202(202a、202b)和相对位置检测部234来计测基板P被搬入图案化装置内时的宽度方向上的位置位移和变形(因扭曲导致的微小倾斜),并通过基板调整部214(辊AR1、RT3、AR2)进行修正。For example, when constructing a production line, in order to prevent the substrate P passing through the patterning device (exposure units 121, 121a to 121c) from shifting in the width direction, the rollers in the patterning device and the rollers in the processing device (position adjustment units 120, 120a) on the upstream side of the patterning device are parallelized, but after starting the processing of the substrate P, there is a case where the ground surface is slightly sunken and tilted locally due to the influence of the device load, etc. over time. Even in such a case, the position displacement and deformation (micro tilt caused by twisting) in the width direction when the substrate P is carried into the patterning device can be measured by the first substrate detection unit 202 (202a, 202b) and the relative position detection unit 234, and correction can be made by the substrate adjustment unit 214 (rollers AR1, RT3, AR2).

另外,在第4实施方式的情况下,由图16所示那样的多个辊(其中的至少一个辊能够倾斜)构成的基板调整部214如图12所示设在曝光单元121c侧的主体框架215上,但也可以设在位置调整单元120a内的主体框架207b上。该情况下,在为了隔绝或抑制振动传递而相互分离的位置调整单元120a(第1处理装置)和曝光单元121c(第2处理装置)中,设于曝光单元121c侧的第2基板检测部208与图2中所示的第2基板检测部124同样地,设在引导辊Rs3或张力辊RT1的附近。而且,也可以是,位置调整单元120a(第1处理装置)和曝光单元121c(第2处理装置)均独立,将基板调整部214作为单独的单元设在设置面E上。In the case of the fourth embodiment, the substrate adjustment unit 214 composed of a plurality of rollers (at least one of which can be tilted) as shown in FIG. 16 is provided on the main frame 215 on the side of the exposure unit 121c as shown in FIG. 12, but it may be provided on the main frame 207b in the position adjustment unit 120a. In this case, in the position adjustment unit 120a (first processing device) and the exposure unit 121c (second processing device) separated from each other in order to isolate or suppress the transmission of vibration, the second substrate detection unit 208 provided on the side of the exposure unit 121c is provided near the guide roller Rs3 or the tension roller RT1, similarly to the second substrate detection unit 124 shown in FIG. 2. In addition, the position adjustment unit 120a (first processing device) and the exposure unit 121c (second processing device) may be independent, and the substrate adjustment unit 214 may be provided on the installation surface E as a separate unit.

在进行光图案化工序的曝光单元121、121c等(第2处理单元)与掌管光图案化工序紧前的工序的前处理装置(第1处理单元)之间设置位置调整单元120a或第1基板检测部202的情况下,能够通过第1基板检测部202来检测从第1处理单元向第2处理单元搬送的基板P的位置变化。另外,在第1处理单元内的基板P的搬送方向的下流侧设置位置调整单元120a或第1基板检测部202的情况下,可以通过第1基板检测部202来检测从第1处理单元向第2处理单元搬送的基板P的位置变化,也可也根据第1基板检测部202所检测出的基板P的位置和由第2基板检测部208或对准显微镜AM1、AM2检测出的基板P的位置来检测从第1处理单元向第2处理单元搬送的基板P的位置变化。另外,还可以通过由相对位置检测部234检测位置调整单元120a与曝光单元121c的相对位置和位置变化,来检测从第1处理单元向第2处理单元搬送的基板P的位置变化。When a position adjustment unit 120a or a first substrate detection unit 202 is provided between the exposure unit 121, 121c, etc. (second processing unit) that performs a light patterning process and a pre-processing device (first processing unit) that manages a process immediately before the light patterning process, the position change of the substrate P transported from the first processing unit to the second processing unit can be detected by the first substrate detection unit 202. In addition, when a position adjustment unit 120a or a first substrate detection unit 202 is provided on the downstream side of the transport direction of the substrate P in the first processing unit, the position change of the substrate P transported from the first processing unit to the second processing unit can be detected by the first substrate detection unit 202, and the position change of the substrate P transported from the first processing unit to the second processing unit can also be detected based on the position of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the position of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 or the alignment microscopes AM1, AM2. In addition, by detecting the relative position and position change of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c by the relative position detection unit 234, the position change of the substrate P transported from the first processing unit to the second processing unit can be detected.

Claims (17)

1.一种图案形成装置,将长尺寸的挠性的片材基板沿长边方向搬送的同时,在该片材基板上的规定位置形成图案,其特征在于,具有:1. A pattern forming device for forming a pattern at a predetermined position on a long flexible sheet substrate while conveying the sheet substrate in the longitudinal direction, characterized in that: 图案化装置,其具有包括用于将所述片材基板沿着规定的搬送路径在长边方向上搬送的多个引导辊在内的搬送部、和设在所述搬送路径的一部分上并在所述片材基板的表面的所述规定位置形成所述图案的图案形成部;A patterning device comprising a conveying section including a plurality of guide rollers for conveying the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined conveying path, and a pattern forming section provided on a portion of the conveying path and forming the pattern at the predetermined position on the surface of the sheet substrate; 减振装置,其设在设置有所述图案化装置的基台面与所述图案化装置之间;A vibration reduction device, which is arranged between the base table surface on which the patterning device is arranged and the patterning device; 位置调整装置,其与所述图案化装置独立地设置且设置在所述基台面上,包括用于朝向所述图案化装置的所述搬送部送出所述片材基板的引导辊,并且在与所述片材基板的长边方向正交的宽度方向上调整所述片材基板的位置;A position adjustment device, which is independently provided from the patterning device and is provided on the base surface, includes a guide roller for delivering the sheet substrate toward the conveying portion of the patterning device, and adjusts the position of the sheet substrate in a width direction orthogonal to the long side direction of the sheet substrate; 位置误差计测部,其计测和所述图案化装置与所述位置调整装置的相对的位置变化相关的变化信息;和a position error measuring unit that measures change information related to a relative position change between the patterning device and the position adjustment device; and 控制装置,其基于所述变化信息来控制所述位置调整装置,a control device for controlling the position adjustment device based on the change information, 在所述搬送部设有能够倾斜的调整辊,所述调整辊相对于所述搬送路径中的所述图案形成部而在上游侧,配置成在所述长边方向上施有规定的张力的状态下,将所述片材基板的所述搬送路径折曲,The conveying section is provided with an inclineable adjustment roller, the adjustment roller being arranged upstream of the pattern forming section in the conveying path so as to bend the conveying path of the sheet substrate while applying a predetermined tension in the long side direction. 所述控制装置通过基于所述变化信息使所述调整辊倾斜,来调整向图案形成部搬送的片材基板的宽度方向上的位置。The control device adjusts the position in the width direction of the sheet substrate conveyed to the pattern forming section by tilting the adjustment roller based on the change information. 2.如权利要求1所述的图案形成装置,其特征在于,2. The pattern forming device according to claim 1, characterized in that 所述图案化装置的所述搬送部具有旋转滚筒,所述旋转滚筒能够以配置成沿所述片材基板的宽度方向延伸的旋转轴为中心而旋转,并且所述旋转滚筒具有相对于所述旋转轴为一定曲率半径的圆筒面状的外周面,所述旋转滚筒沿所述外周面支承所述片材基板的长边方向的一部分。The conveying section of the patterning device has a rotating roller, which can rotate around a rotating axis configured to extend along the width direction of the sheet substrate, and the rotating roller has a cylindrical outer peripheral surface with a certain curvature radius relative to the rotating axis, and the rotating roller supports a portion of the long side direction of the sheet substrate along the outer peripheral surface. 3.如权利要求2所述的图案形成装置,其特征在于,3. The pattern forming device according to claim 2, characterized in that 所述位置误差计测部具有多个位置检测部,所述位置检测部用于检测在所述片材基板的所述宽度方向上的所述图案化装置与所述位置调整装置的相对位置的变化、和所述图案化装置与所述位置调整装置的相对倾斜和/或相对旋转的变化。The position error measuring unit has a plurality of position detecting units for detecting changes in the relative positions of the patterning device and the position adjusting device in the width direction of the sheet substrate, and changes in the relative tilt and/or relative rotation of the patterning device and the position adjusting device. 4.如权利要求2所述的图案形成装置,其特征在于,4. The pattern forming device according to claim 2, characterized in that 还设有第1基板检测部,为了检测从所述位置调整装置送至所述图案化装置的所述搬送部的所述片材基板的所述宽度方向上的倾斜,所述第1基板检测部在所述片材基板的宽度方向的两侧的边缘部分别计测所述片材基板的表面的法线方向的位置的差值。A first substrate detection unit is also provided. In order to detect the inclination in the width direction of the sheet substrate sent from the position adjustment device to the conveying unit of the patterning device, the first substrate detection unit measures the difference in the position of the normal direction of the surface of the sheet substrate at the edge portions on both sides of the width direction of the sheet substrate. 5.如权利要求4所述的图案形成装置,其特征在于,5. The pattern forming device according to claim 4, characterized in that 所述控制装置基于在所述第1基板检测部计测到的所述片材基板的倾斜,调整设于所述图案化装置的所述搬送部的所述调整辊的倾斜量,修正支承于所述旋转滚筒的所述片材基板向所述宽度方向的位移。The control device adjusts the inclination amount of the adjustment roller provided in the conveying section of the patterning device based on the inclination of the sheet substrate measured by the first substrate detection section, and corrects displacement of the sheet substrate supported by the rotating drum in the width direction. 6.如权利要求2~5中任一项所述的图案形成装置,其特征在于,6. The pattern forming device according to any one of claims 2 to 5, characterized in that 所述图案化装置的所述图案形成部包含曝光装置和印刷装置中的某一方,所述曝光装置向由所述旋转滚筒的外周面支承的所述片材基板的表面投射与所述图案相应的光能,所述印刷装置通过涂敷墨水而在所述片材基板的表面上描画所述图案。The pattern forming part of the patterning device includes one of an exposure device and a printing device, wherein the exposure device projects light energy corresponding to the pattern onto the surface of the sheet substrate supported by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, and the printing device draws the pattern on the surface of the sheet substrate by applying ink. 7.一种器件制造系统,将长尺寸的挠性的片材基板沿长边方向搬送的同时,对该片材基板依次实施第1处理、第2处理,其特征在于,具有:7. A device manufacturing system, which sequentially performs a first treatment and a second treatment on a long flexible sheet substrate while conveying the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction, characterized in that: 第1处理单元,其设在规定的基台面上,包括用于将所述片材基板沿着规定的搬送路径在长边方向上输送的多个辊,并对所述片材基板实施所述第1处理;a first processing unit, which is provided on a predetermined base surface and includes a plurality of rollers for conveying the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined conveying path, and performs the first processing on the sheet substrate; 第2处理单元,其设置在所述基台面上,包括用于将从所述第1处理单元输送来的所述片材基板沿着规定的搬送路径在长边方向上输送的多个辊,并对所述片材基板实施所述第2处理;a second processing unit, which is disposed on the base surface and includes a plurality of rollers for conveying the sheet substrate conveyed from the first processing unit along a predetermined conveying path in a longitudinal direction and performs the second processing on the sheet substrate; 防振装置,其抑制或隔绝所述基台面与所述第1处理单元之间的振动传递、或所述基台面与所述第2处理单元之间的振动传递、或所述第1处理单元与所述第2处理单元之间的振动传递;an anti-vibration device for suppressing or isolating vibration transmission between the base surface and the first processing unit, or between the base surface and the second processing unit, or between the first processing unit and the second processing unit; 变化计测部,其对与所述第1处理单元与所述第2处理单元的相对的位置变化、或从所述第1处理单元向所述第2处理单元搬送的所述片材基板的位置变化相关的变化信息进行计测;a change measuring unit that measures change information related to a relative position change between the first processing unit and the second processing unit or a position change of the sheet substrate conveyed from the first processing unit to the second processing unit; 位置调整装置,其基于所述变化信息来调整向所述第2处理单元内搬入的所述片材基板的与长边方向正交的宽度方向上的位置,a position adjustment device for adjusting the position of the sheet substrate carried into the second processing unit in a width direction perpendicular to the long side direction based on the change information, 所述位置调整装置具有:将所述片材基板在长边方向上折曲而引导搬送的多个旋转辊;使该多个旋转辊中的一部分旋转辊沿旋转中心轴的方向平行移动的驱动机构;和基于由所述变化计测部计测的所述变化信息来控制所述驱动机构的控制部。The position adjustment device comprises: a plurality of rotating rollers for guiding the conveyance of the sheet substrate by bending it in the long side direction; a driving mechanism for moving some of the plurality of rotating rollers parallel to the direction of the rotation center axis; and a control unit for controlling the driving mechanism based on the change information measured by the change measuring unit. 8.如权利要求7所述的器件制造系统,其特征在于,8. The device manufacturing system according to claim 7, characterized in that: 所述第2处理单元是包含曝光装置和印刷装置中的某一方的图案化装置,其中,该曝光装置为了在所述片材基板的长边方向上形成电子器件用的图案,而向形成于所述片材基板的表面的光感应层投射与所述图案相应的光能,该印刷装置通过涂敷含有导电材料、绝缘材料、半导体材料中的某一种的墨水而在所述片材基板的表面上描画所述图案。The second processing unit is a patterning device including one of an exposure device and a printing device, wherein the exposure device projects light energy corresponding to the pattern onto a photosensitive layer formed on the surface of the sheet substrate in order to form a pattern for electronic devices in the long side direction of the sheet substrate, and the printing device draws the pattern on the surface of the sheet substrate by applying ink containing one of conductive material, insulating material, and semiconductor material. 9.如权利要求8所述的器件制造系统,其特征在于,9. The device manufacturing system according to claim 8, characterized in that: 所述第1处理单元由实施与通过所述图案化装置在所述片材基板上实施的处理的前工序相当的处理的、单独的或多个前处理装置构成,The first processing unit is composed of a single or a plurality of pre-processing devices that perform a process corresponding to a pre-processing step performed on the sheet substrate by the patterning device. 所述位置调整装置设于在所述片材基板的搬送路上设置在所述图案化装置紧前的所述前处理装置内,或设于所述紧前的前处理装置与所述图案化装置之间。The position adjustment device is provided in the pre-processing device provided immediately before the patterning device on the conveyance path of the sheet substrate, or is provided between the immediately preceding pre-processing device and the patterning device. 10.如权利要求9所述的器件制造系统,其特征在于,10. The device manufacturing system according to claim 9, characterized in that: 所述变化计测部包括传感器,该传感器配置在所述第1处理单元与所述第2处理单元之间的所述片材基板的搬送路上,且将与所述长边方向正交的所述片材基板的宽度方向上的倾斜变化作为所述变化信息来检测。The change measuring section includes a sensor disposed on a conveyance path of the sheet substrate between the first processing unit and the second processing unit and detecting a tilt change in a width direction of the sheet substrate orthogonal to the long side direction as the change information. 11.如权利要求7~9中任一项所述的器件制造系统,其特征在于,11. The device manufacturing system according to any one of claims 7 to 9, characterized in that: 所述驱动机构使所述多个旋转辊中的与平行移动的所述旋转辊不同的旋转辊的旋转中心轴倾斜。The driving mechanism tilts a rotation center axis of a rotating roller other than the rotating roller that moves in parallel among the plurality of rotating rollers. 12.如权利要求11所述的器件制造系统,其特征在于,12. The device manufacturing system according to claim 11, characterized in that: 所述变化计测部包括传感器,该传感器配置在所述第1处理单元与所述第2处理单元之间的所述片材基板的搬送路上,且将与所述长边方向正交的所述片材基板的宽度方向上的倾斜变化作为所述变化信息来检测。The change measuring section includes a sensor disposed on a conveyance path of the sheet substrate between the first processing unit and the second processing unit and detecting a tilt change in a width direction of the sheet substrate orthogonal to the long side direction as the change information. 13.一种器件制造系统,在沿规定的搬送路径在长边方向搬送的挠性的长尺寸的片材基板上形成电子器件的图案,其特征在于,具有:13. A device manufacturing system for forming a pattern of an electronic device on a flexible long sheet substrate conveyed in a long-side direction along a predetermined conveying path, characterized in that: 搬送部,所述搬送部包括用于将所述片材基板沿着所述搬送路径在长边方向上搬送的多个引导辊;a conveying section including a plurality of guide rollers for conveying the sheet substrate along the conveying path in a longitudinal direction; 旋转滚筒,所述旋转滚筒设在所述搬送路径的一部分上,绕配置成沿所述片材基板的正交于长边方向的宽度方向延伸的旋转中心而旋转,并且所述旋转滚筒具有相对于所述旋转中心为一定曲率半径的圆筒面状的外周面,所述旋转滚筒沿所述外周面支承包含形成有所述图案的区域在内的所述片材基板的长边方向的一部分;a rotating roller, the rotating roller being provided on a part of the conveying path, rotating about a rotation center arranged to extend along a width direction of the sheet substrate orthogonal to the long side direction, and the rotating roller having a cylindrical outer peripheral surface with a constant radius of curvature relative to the rotation center, and the rotating roller supporting a part of the sheet substrate in the long side direction including a region where the pattern is formed, along the outer peripheral surface; 图案形成部,与所述旋转滚筒相对地配置,在由所述旋转滚筒的外周面支承的所述片材基板的一部分的表面形成所述电子器件的图案;a pattern forming section arranged opposite to the rotating drum and forming a pattern of the electronic device on a surface of a portion of the sheet substrate supported by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum; 调整辊,其作为所述搬送部的一部分而配置在所述搬送路径上的所述旋转滚筒的上游侧,能够绕沿所述片材基板的宽度方向延伸的旋转轴而旋转,且在长边方向上卷绕并引导所述片材基板的一部分,并能够通过驱动部来调整所述旋转轴的倾斜;an adjustment roller, which is arranged on the upstream side of the rotating drum on the conveying path as a part of the conveying section, and can rotate around a rotation axis extending in the width direction of the sheet substrate, and can wind and guide a part of the sheet substrate in the long side direction, and can adjust the inclination of the rotation axis by a driving section; 基板误差计测部,其配置在相对于所述搬送路径中的所述图案形成部而言的上游侧,计测与所述片材基板的所述宽度方向上的位置变化、姿势变化、或所述片材基板的变形相关的变化信息;和a substrate error measuring section disposed on an upstream side relative to the pattern forming section in the conveying path, and measuring change information related to a position change, a posture change, or a deformation of the sheet substrate in the width direction of the sheet substrate; and 控制部,其基于由所述基板误差计测部计测到的所述变化信息来控制用于调整所述调整辊的倾斜的所述驱动部。A control unit controls the driving unit for adjusting the inclination of the adjustment roller based on the change information measured by the substrate error measuring unit. 14.如权利要求13所述的器件制造系统,其特征在于,14. The device manufacturing system according to claim 13, characterized in that: 所述基板误差计测部包括第1基板检测部,所述第1基板检测部配置在所述搬送路径上的所述调整辊的上游侧,在所述片材基板的宽度方向的两侧的边缘部分别计测所述片材基板的表面的法线方向的位置,根据其位置的差值来计测所述片材基板的宽度方向上的倾斜变化而输出所述变化信息。The substrate error measuring unit includes a first substrate detection unit, which is arranged on the upstream side of the adjustment roller on the conveying path, and measures the position of the normal direction of the surface of the sheet substrate at the edge portions on both sides of the width direction of the sheet substrate, and measures the inclination change in the width direction of the sheet substrate based on the difference in their positions to output the change information. 15.如权利要求13所述的器件制造系统,其特征在于,15. The device manufacturing system according to claim 13, characterized in that: 所述基板误差计测部包括第2基板检测部,所述第2基板检测部配置在所述搬送路径上的所述旋转滚筒的上游侧,计测所述片材基板的宽度方向的边缘部的位置变化并输出所述变化信息。The substrate error measuring unit includes a second substrate detecting unit disposed on the upstream side of the rotating drum on the conveying path, and measures a position change of an edge portion in a width direction of the sheet substrate and outputs the change information. 16.如权利要求13所述的器件制造系统,其特征在于,16. The device manufacturing system according to claim 13, characterized in that: 在所述旋转滚筒设有由转子和定子构成的电动马达,所述转子在作为所述旋转中心而由轴承支承的旋转轴的周围呈环状排列磁铁单元,所述定子包括以固定于装置的支承框架并与所述转子的磁铁单元相对的方式配置的线圈单元,The rotating drum is provided with an electric motor composed of a rotor and a stator, wherein the rotor has magnet units arranged in a ring shape around a rotating shaft supported by a bearing as the rotation center, and the stator includes a coil unit fixed to a support frame of the device and arranged in a manner opposite to the magnet unit of the rotor. 所述旋转滚筒以通过所述电动马达直接传递动力的直接驱动方式被驱动旋转。The rotating drum is driven to rotate in a direct drive manner in which power is directly transmitted from the electric motor. 17.如权利要求13所述的器件制造系统,其特征在于,17. The device manufacturing system according to claim 13, characterized in that: 在所述旋转滚筒设有第1马达和第2马达,所述第1马达对作为所述旋转中心而被轴承支承的旋转轴赋予旋转扭矩,第2马达用于对所述旋转轴施加轴向的推力而使所述旋转滚筒在所述片材基板的宽度方向上微动。The rotating drum is provided with a first motor and a second motor. The first motor imparts a rotation torque to a rotating shaft supported by a bearing as the rotation center, and the second motor is used to apply an axial thrust to the rotating shaft to slightly move the rotating drum in the width direction of the sheet substrate.
HK18104878.9A 2013-07-08 2016-07-21 Device manufacturing system, and pattern formation apparatus HK1245421B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013-142922 2013-07-08
JP2013142922A JP2015018006A (en) 2013-07-08 2013-07-08 Substrate treatment apparatus, device production system, and device production method
JP2014123088A JP6459234B2 (en) 2014-06-16 2014-06-16 Substrate processing equipment
JP2014-123088 2014-06-16

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
HK16108788.1A Addition HK1220776B (en) 2013-07-08 2014-06-25 Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
HK16108788.1A Division HK1220776B (en) 2013-07-08 2014-06-25 Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
HK1245421A1 HK1245421A1 (en) 2018-08-24
HK1245421B true HK1245421B (en) 2020-05-15

Family

ID=52279804

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
HK18116748.1A HK1257621A1 (en) 2013-07-08 2016-07-21 Substrate processing apparatus
HK18104878.9A HK1245421B (en) 2013-07-08 2016-07-21 Device manufacturing system, and pattern formation apparatus

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
HK18116748.1A HK1257621A1 (en) 2013-07-08 2016-07-21 Substrate processing apparatus

Country Status (5)

Country Link
KR (5) KR102007627B1 (en)
CN (3) CN108919607B (en)
HK (2) HK1257621A1 (en)
TW (4) TWI757817B (en)
WO (1) WO2015005118A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6561474B2 (en) * 2015-01-20 2019-08-21 大日本印刷株式会社 Method for manufacturing flexible display device
WO2016204202A1 (en) * 2015-06-15 2016-12-22 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Production method for organic electroluminescent elements
CN119620563A (en) * 2017-07-14 2025-03-14 Asml荷兰有限公司 Metrology equipment and substrate platform conveyor system
CN111103097A (en) * 2018-10-29 2020-05-05 长鑫存储技术有限公司 Water leakage detection equipment and exposure machine with same
KR102267473B1 (en) * 2019-06-26 2021-06-22 한국기계연구원 Fine pattern roll manufacturing system via tension control, and method of manufacturing fine pattern roll using the same
JP2019200433A (en) * 2019-08-01 2019-11-21 株式会社ニコン Pattern drawing method
KR102755075B1 (en) * 2019-11-15 2025-01-14 캐논 톡키 가부시키가이샤 Film forming apparatus
JP7441076B2 (en) * 2020-03-03 2024-02-29 株式会社Screenホールディングス drawing device
CN111580473B (en) * 2020-04-10 2021-05-28 彩虹集团有限公司 Method for automatically controlling glass extraction amount of liquid crystal substrate
US12063633B2 (en) 2020-08-24 2024-08-13 Qualcomm Incorporated SPS and ULCG enhancements
KR20230073216A (en) * 2020-09-28 2023-05-25 에이에스엠엘 네델란즈 비.브이. Metrology tool with position control of the projection system
JP7707042B2 (en) * 2021-11-26 2025-07-14 株式会社オーク製作所 Exposure Equipment
JP2023130748A (en) * 2022-03-08 2023-09-21 株式会社Screenホールディングス Exposure equipment and exposure method

Family Cites Families (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6019037U (en) * 1983-07-18 1985-02-08 株式会社リコー exposure equipment
JP2880314B2 (en) * 1991-03-26 1999-04-05 ウシオ電機株式会社 Film transport mechanism and exposure apparatus equipped with this film transport mechanism
JP3741013B2 (en) * 2001-09-17 2006-02-01 ウシオ電機株式会社 Belt-shaped workpiece exposure device with meandering correction mechanism
JP2006098718A (en) * 2004-09-29 2006-04-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Drawing apparatus
JP2006102991A (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-20 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image recording device and image recording method
CN100517080C (en) * 2006-04-27 2009-07-22 株式会社Orc制作所 Handling device
JP5181451B2 (en) * 2006-09-20 2013-04-10 株式会社ニコン Mask, exposure apparatus, exposure method, and device manufacturing method
JP2009220945A (en) * 2008-03-17 2009-10-01 Orc Mfg Co Ltd Conveyance apparatus
CN101364052B (en) * 2008-10-08 2010-10-27 上海微电子装备有限公司 Active vibration damping system and forecast control method thereof
JP2010207961A (en) * 2009-03-10 2010-09-24 Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Die cutting method for long film and device therefor
US8541163B2 (en) * 2009-06-05 2013-09-24 Nikon Corporation Transporting method, transporting apparatus, exposure method, and exposure apparatus
KR101070734B1 (en) * 2009-06-30 2011-10-07 건국대학교 산학협력단 Feedforward control of cross direction register system and methode for printed electronics roll-to-roll
US8379186B2 (en) * 2009-07-17 2013-02-19 Nikon Corporation Pattern formation apparatus, pattern formation method, and device manufacturing method
KR101816327B1 (en) * 2010-02-12 2018-01-08 가부시키가이샤 니콘 Substrate processing device
NL2006385A (en) * 2010-04-12 2011-10-13 Asml Netherlands Bv Substrate handling apparatus and lithographic apparatus.
JP5929761B2 (en) * 2010-12-15 2016-06-08 株式会社ニコン Substrate processing system and display element manufacturing method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20190141793A (en) 2019-12-24
TW201832017A (en) 2018-09-01
TWI706234B (en) 2020-10-01
TWI627510B (en) 2018-06-21
TWI757817B (en) 2022-03-11
KR102097769B1 (en) 2020-04-07
TW202041981A (en) 2020-11-16
KR102058830B1 (en) 2019-12-23
KR102007627B1 (en) 2019-08-05
KR101984360B1 (en) 2019-05-30
CN108919607B (en) 2020-10-30
TWI681261B (en) 2020-01-01
CN107255908A (en) 2017-10-17
CN105556391A (en) 2016-05-04
HK1220776A1 (en) 2017-05-12
KR102219169B1 (en) 2021-02-23
CN105556391B (en) 2018-06-29
CN107255908B (en) 2019-08-06
WO2015005118A1 (en) 2015-01-15
TW202013096A (en) 2020-04-01
CN108919607A (en) 2018-11-30
KR20160029099A (en) 2016-03-14
KR20190091575A (en) 2019-08-06
HK1257621A1 (en) 2019-10-25
KR20190060003A (en) 2019-05-31
TW201514631A (en) 2015-04-16
KR20200037452A (en) 2020-04-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI681261B (en) Component Manufacturing System
JP6849119B2 (en) Direct drawing exposure device
HK1245421A1 (en) Device manufacturing system, and pattern formation apparatus
CN104871091B (en) Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, and device manufacturing method
JP2020170162A (en) Scanning exposure method and device manufacturing method
JP6459234B2 (en) Substrate processing equipment
JP2015018006A (en) Substrate treatment apparatus, device production system, and device production method
JP6702404B2 (en) Device manufacturing system and device manufacturing method
JP2020166275A (en) Pattern forming device
HK1220776B (en) Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus
TWI745865B (en) Substrate processing device and component manufacturing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PC Patent ceased (i.e. patent has lapsed due to the failure to pay the renewal fee)

Effective date: 20230624